SPECIFICATION - Simkin

153
SPECIFICATION of work to be done and materials to be used in carrying out the works shown on the accompanying drawings Kennedy Park Reception Project (project name) 11 Storkey Street, Marewa, Napier, New Zealand (project address) Napier City Council (client) Project Ref: 1535 Date: 10 January 2016 FOR BUILDING CONSENT APPLICATION

Transcript of SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Page 1: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

SPECIFICATION of work to be done and materials to be used in carrying out the works shown on the accompanying drawings

Kennedy Park Reception Project (project name)

11 Storkey Street, Marewa, Napier, New Zealand (project address)

Napier City Council (client)

Project Ref: 1535

Date: 10 January 2016 FOR BUILDING CONSENT APPLICATION

Page 2: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1220 PROJECT1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS1234 DOCUMENTATION1235 SHOP DRAWINGS1237 WARRANTIES1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE1240 ESTABLISHMENT1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT1270 CONSTRUCTION2110 DEMOLITION WORKS3820 CARPENTRY4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS5151 INTERNAL TRIM5230 INTERIOR DOORS5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING6512 CARPET TILES6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS7430 DRAINAGE7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING

3578

11131518222429333640454954596473788287909397

100105109114117122124126132137140142145151

Page 3: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1220 PROJECT

  This general section describes the project including:

� A description of the work � Site description, features and restrictions � Design parameters for design by contractor � Archaeological discovery

1 GENERAL

Read all general sections together with all other sections.

Description of the work

1.1 READ ALL SECTIONS TOGETHER

The project is to provide a new single story building to provide reception, administration and staff facilities at Kennedy Park, Napier.  Part of the building falls under NZS 3604 and the taller reception part is subject to specific engineering design. Demolition of part of an existing building has to take place to allow the new building to proceed, and the existing building will be removed later to make way for a new car park under a separate contract.

1.2 SCOPE OF THE WORK

This project does not include Restricted Building Work.

Site

1.3 NO RESTRICTED BUILDING WORK

1.4 SITE

The site consists of: a flat area with existing buildings as shown on drawing no.

drawing 1535GA.10

The site of the works, the street address and the legal description are shown on the drawings. 1.5 LEGAL DESCRIPTION

1.6 EXISTING BUILDINGS

Existing buildings consist of:

a two story timber framed building being used to provide reception and administration facilities

Refer to drawing(s) no(s):

1535 GA.10  New Site Plan

The following are the network utility services: 1.7 EXISTING SERVICES

Electrical: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.16 Telecommunication:   Water: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.17     Stormwater: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.11 Foul water: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.11

Site environment - Wind

1.8 SITE FEATURES

The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, Table 5.4 Determination of wind zone, up to and including Extra High Wind Zone.

Site environment - Durability

1.9 WIND DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

Building wind zone Medium / 37 m/s (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4)

The exposure zone is to NZS 3604, Section 4 Durability, 4.2 Exposure zones and NZBC E2/AS1.

Site environment - Seismic

1.10 EXPOSURE ZONE

The site zone is: Zone C Medium

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1220 PROJECT Page 3

Page 4: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

The zone is to NZS 3604, Section 5 Bracing design, 5.3 Earthquake bracing demand.

Archaeological discovery

1.11 EARTHQUAKE ZONE - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

The earthquake zone is: Zone 3  

Report the finding of any fossils, antiquities and other items of value, to the Contract Administrator. All to remain undisturbed until approval is given for removal.   Pre-1900, items or evidence of human activity on the site, come under the Heritage New Zealand Pouhere Taonga Act 2014. If such items or evidence is discovered work must stop immediately and the Contract Administrator must be notified immediately. The site may be classified as an Archaeological Site under the Act, and the Contract Administrator or Owner must contact the Heritage New Zealand for authority to proceed.   Post-1900 items remain the property of the owner, pre-1900 items may remain the property of the owner or the Crown subject to what is found.

1.12 ANTIQUITIES AND ITEMS OF VALUE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1220 PROJECT Page 4

Page 5: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS

  This general section relates to interpretation and definitions that are used in this specification.

1 GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

Required: Required by the documents, the New Zealand Building Code or by a statutory authority.

Proprietary: Identifiable by naming the manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade name, brand name, catalogue or reference number.

Provide and fix: "Provide" or "fix" or "supply" or "fix" if used separately mean provide and fix unless explicitly stated otherwise.

Review: Review by the contract administrator is for general compliance only.  Review does not remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturers and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes.  Neither can the review be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.

Working Day: Working Day means a calendar day other than any Saturday, Sunday, public holiday or any day falling within the period from 24 December to 5 January, both days inclusive, irrespective of the days on which work is actually carried out.

Contract Administrator:

1.2 PERSONNEL

Owner: The person defined as "owner" in the New Zealand Building Code. Principal: The person defined as "principal" in the conditions of contract. Contractor: The person contracted by the principal to carry out the contract.

  The person appointed by the principal to administer the contract on the principal's behalf. Where no person has been appointed by the Principal, it means the Principal or the Principal's representative.

The following abbreviations are used throughout the specification: 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AS Australian Standard AS/NZS Joint Australian/New Zealand Standard ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCINZ Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries of New Zealand Inc. BCA Building Consent Authority BRANZ Building Research Association of New Zealand BS British Standard CSIRO Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation HERA Heavy Engineering Research Association LBP Licensed Building Practitioner MBIE Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment (includes the old DBH) MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc NZBC New Zealand Building Code NZS New Zealand Standard NZS/AS Joint New Zealand/Australian Standard NZTA New Zealand Transport Agency (previously TNZ) NUO Network Utility Operator PS1 Producer Statement – Design PS2 Producer Statement – Design Review PS3 Producer Statement - Construction PS4 Producer Statement – Construction Review RBW Restricted Building Work SARNZ Scaffolding and Rigging Association New Zealand Inc SED Specific Engineering Design TA Territorial Authority TNZ Transit New Zealand (Transit New Zealand is now New Zealand Transport

Agency NZTA, some specifications are still prefixed TNZ)

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS Page 5

Page 6: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Words defined in the conditions of contract, New Zealand Standards, or other reference documents, to have the same interpretation and meaning when used in their lower case, title case or upper case form in the specification text.

1.4 DEFINED WORDS

Where the context requires, words importing singular only, also include plural and vice versa. 1.5 WORDS IMPORTING PLURAL AND SINGULAR

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS Page 6

Page 7: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

1 GENERAL

Throughout this specification, reference is made to various New Zealand Building Code Compliance Documents (NZBC __), acceptable solutions (__ AS_) and verification methods (__ VM_) for criteria and/or methods used to establish compliance with the New Zealand Building Code.   Reference is also made to various standards produced by Standards New Zealand (NZS, AS/NZS, NZS/AS), overseas standards and to listed Acts, Regulations and various industry codes of practice and practice guides. The latest edition (including amendments and provisional editions) at the date of this specification applies unless stated otherwise.   It is the responsibility of the contractor to be familiar with the materials and expert in the techniques quoted in these publications.   Documents cited both directly and within other cited publications are deemed to form part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited documents.

1.1 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

Documents referred to in the GENERAL sections are:  

Building Act 2004 Building Regulations 1992 Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995 New Zealand Building Code Heritage New Zealand Pouhere Taonga Act 2014 Resource Management Act 1991 Smoke-free Environments Act 1990

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads AS/NZS 3012 Electrical installations - Construction and demolition sites NZS 3109 Concrete construction NZS 3114 Specification for concrete surface finishes NZS 3404:1997 Steel structures standard NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and workmanship NZS 6803 Acoustics - Construction Noise

WorkSafe NZ Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the construction industry

SARNZ Best practice guideline for scaffolding in New Zealand

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Page 7

Page 8: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1234 DOCUMENTATION

This general section relates to documentation required by the Territorial Authority/Building Consent Authority for compliance with the New Zealand Building Code. It also includes documentation relating to:

� Substitutions � Manufacturers documents

Building Consent Authority documentation

1 GENERAL

Obtain the building consent forms and documents from the owner and keep them on site.  Liaise with the BCA for all notices to be given and all inspections required during construction to ensure compliance.  Return the consent form and documents to the owner on completion.

1.1 BUILDING CONSENT

It is an offence under the Building Act 2004 � to carry out any work not in accordance with the building consent. � to carry out Restricted Building Work by anyone other than a Licensed Building Practitioner licensed for

that type of work.   The resolution of matters concerning building code compliance to be referred to the contract administrator for a direction and then if required to the BCA for consent.   Where any alteration is requested by the territorial authority or any other authority, do not undertake such alteration until the matter has been referred to the contract administrator for direction.

1.2 BUILDING CONSENT COMPLIANCE

Provide names and contact details of the contractor's key personnel and tradespersons who are involved with the project.  Review the list once a month and reissue it if changes have been made.

Licensed Building Practitioner documentation

1.3 PROJECT PERSONNEL

Provide LBP details.  Provide names, LBP numbers, areas of practice and contact information.  Provide this information to the BCA before commencing work on the Restricted Building Work in the form required by the BCA. Advise the BCA of any change to an LPB previously advised.   Include the following as applicable

� Site LBP � Carpenter � Foundations 1 Concrete foundation walls and concrete slab-on-ground constructor � Foundations 2 Concrete or timber pile foundations constructor � Bricklaying and block laying 1 Brick / masonry veneer � Bricklaying and block laying 2 Structural masonry - Bricklayer / Blocklayer � Roofing 1 Concrete / clay tile roofer � Roofing 2 Profiled metal roofer and/or wall cladding installer � Roofing 3 Metal tile roofer � Roofing 4 Membrane roofer � Roofing 5 Torch on membrane roofer � Roofing 6 Liquid membrane roofer � Roofing 7 Shingle / slate roofer � External plastering 1 Solid plasterer � External plastering 2 Proprietary Plaster Cladding Systems (PPCS) plasterer

  Also provide names and contact details of the following

� Registered drainlayer � Registered plumber � Registered gasfitter � Registered electrician

1.4 LICENSED BUILDING PRACTITIONERS

When producer statements verifying construction are required, provide copies to both the Building Consent Authority and the Contract Administrator.  Provide producer statements in the form required by the BCA.

1.5 PRODUCER STATEMENTS

Where Restricted Building Work is carried out by a LBP, on completion provide a Record of Work.  Provide copies to both the BCA and the Contract Administrator.

1.6 RECORD OF WORK

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1234 DOCUMENTATION Page 8

Page 9: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Compliance information

Information may be required either as a condition of the contract documents or as a condition of the building consent.  It may include the following:

� Applicators approval certificate from the manufacturer / supplier � Manufacturer's / supplier's warranty � Installer / applicator's warranty � Producer Statement - Construction from the applicator / installer � Producer Statement - Construction review from an acceptable suitably qualified person

  Refer to the general sections for the requirements for compliance information to be provided by the contractor.   Refer to the building consent for the requirements for compliance information to be provided by the contractor.  Obtain required documents from the relevant parties for delivery to the contract administrator after the final inspection has been carried out by the BCA.

1.7 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE

As soon as practicable after completion of the building work, provide in writing the following information and documentation to the client and the relevant territorial authority.   Information and documentation relating to:

� The identity of the building contractor and the subcontractors who carried out the work. � Maintenance requirements for any products incorporated in the building.

  If applicable also provide any guarantee or insurance obtained by the building contractor in relation to the building work.

Substitutions

1.8 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED ON COMPLETION

Where a product or material supplier is named in SELECTIONS, the product/material must be provided by the named supplier.  Where more than one named supplier, any one of the named suppliers will be acceptable.

1.9 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT/MATERIAL SUPPLIERS

Where specifically stated in a section, substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified systems, components and associated products listed in that section.

1.10 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

A substitution may be proposed where specified products are not reasonably available. A substitution may also be proposed by the contractor where the contractor considers a proposed substitution to be an alternative to the specified product.  Except where a specified product is not available, the contract administrator is not bound to accept any substitutions.  Where branded work sections are included in this specification, substitution of those products or systems will not be allowed.

1.11 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS

Notify proposed substitution of specified products. Notification to include but not be limited to: � Product identification � Manufacturer's name, address, telephone number, website and email address � Detailed comparison between the properties and characteristics of the specified product and the

proposed substitution � Statement of NZBC compliance including durability � Details of manufacturer warranties

  Plus an assessment of:

� Any changes required to the programme including any extension of time required � Any consequential effects of the proposed substitution � Allowance for time and cost for re-design and documentation (if applicable) � Allowance for time and cost for obtaining an amendment to the Building Consent (if applicable) � Any change in cost associated with the proposed substitution

  and if requested:

� All current manufacturer's literature on the product � Accreditations and appraisals available � Reference standards � Product limitations � Samples � List of existing installations in the vicinity of the project

1.12 NOTIFICATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1234 DOCUMENTATION Page 9

Page 10: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

The Contract administrator must advise of acceptance of substitutions in writing.

Variations to issued Building Consent

1.13 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTITUTIONS

Where the contractor has sought acceptance of a substitution or a variation which is for the contractor's own convenience and the substitution or variation requires an amendment to the Building Consent, the contractor must apply for and obtain the required amendment.   The contractor must:

� Obtain approval for substitutions from the contract administrator. � Prepare and provide to the BCA all documentation required for the variation. � Pay all fees and other costs associated with this amendment. � Where the amendment affects other approved plans, also amend those plans.

1.14 CONTRACTOR VARIATION TO BUILDING CONSENT

Where the principal is proposing a substitution or a variation which requires an amendment to the Building Consent, the contractor must provide to the principal information that the contractor has that is required for the amendment.   The principal will:

� Prepare and provide to the BCA all documentation required for the amendment. � Pay all fees and other costs associated with this amendment. � Where the amendment affects other approved plans, also amend those plans.

Manufacturer's documents

1.15 PRINCIPALS VARIATION TO BUILDING CONSENT

Manufacturers and supplier’s requirements, instructions, specifications or details means those issued by them for their particular material, product or component and are the latest edition.

1.16 MANUFACTURER’S AND SUPPLIER’S INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Where manufacturer’s installation, application and execution requirements are referred to in this specification, the Contractor must ensure that are fully aware of this documentation.  Whenever necessary obtain and keep on site the relevant latest version of such documentation and make it available to workers carrying out that part of the work

1.17 CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN CURRENT DOCUMENTATION

Documentation including manufacturer’s installation instructions, specification data sheets, producer statements, BRANZ and similar appraisals may be included in the issued Building Consent.  These documents have been provided only to demonstrate compliance with the NZBC.

Branded work sections

1.18 DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED FOR BUILDING CONSENT

Branded sections may be included in this specification relating to specific products and systems to be installed as part of the contract works.  Where branded sections are included, substitutions to the branded products and systems will not be allowed.

1.19 BRANDED WORK SECTIONS

If any related work is cross referenced to a generic work section, but only the equivalent branded section is included in the specification, use that branded section.  Confirm with the contract administrator if there is any doubt.

1.20 CROSS REFERENCED WORK SECTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1234 DOCUMENTATION Page 10

Page 11: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1235 SHOP DRAWINGS

This general section relates to common requirements for the preparation, submission and review of shop drawings as listed in this section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project.  Detailed requirements for shop drawings for particular parts of the work are included in the specific work section.

1 GENERAL

Prepare shop drawings where specified in the work sections.  Refer to SCHEDULES. 1.1 PREPARE SHOP DRAWINGS

Prepare shop drawings at appropriate scales to enable good legibility.  Unless otherwise specified in a work section, submit shop drawings in the format as listed in SELECTIONS.

1.2 SHOP DRAWING FORMAT

Allow time in the programme for the preparation, coordination and review of shop drawings.  Allow also for such resubmission and further review as may be required prior to fabrication.  No extension of time will be allowed for resubmission and further review.

1.3 PROGRAMME FOR SHOP DRAWINGS

Agree and arrange for such direct contact as is appropriate between detailer, consultant and others whose input may be required in the preparation of the shop drawings.  Such direct communication does not relieve the contractor of the need to carry out their own coordination and check of shop drawings.

1.4 COMMUNICATION WITH SHOP DRAWING DETAILER

Before submitting the shop drawings for review, carry out coordination to ensure that allowance has been made for all other parts of the work that relate to the work detailed in the shop drawings.

1.5 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION OF SHOP DRAWINGS

The contractor is solely responsible for coordination of shop drawing dimensions with site measurements.  The reviewer's dimensional review is limited to visual/aesthetic matters only

1.6 COORDINATION WITH SITE MEASURE

Submit shop drawings to the named reviewers for review, in due time to ensure conformance with the contract programme.

� Where no time is stated in a specific section allow 10 working days for review by the reviewer.  Where a large number of drawings are involved more time will be necessary.

� Where no person is named as the reviewer, submit the shop drawings to the contract administrator. Shop drawing review indicates only that the shop drawing interpretation of the design concept has been reviewed without the need for further modification, other than the corrections indicated by the reviewer. The reviewer may advise that:

� The shop drawings have been reviewed and work may proceed; or � The shop drawings have been reviewed and work may proceed subject to notes, annotations or

comments provided; or � The shop drawings have been reviewed and work may proceed subject to notes, annotations or

comments provided.  Resubmitted revised shop drawings shall be provided for the record, or � Work may not proceed.  Revise and resubmit shop drawings

1.7 SHOP DRAWING REVIEW

Review of shop drawings does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the correctness of the shop drawings, site dimensions, the overall design, coordination and performance, or for ensuring the work is carried out in compliance with the contract documents.  It does not remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturers and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes.  Review cannot be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.

1.8 RESPONSIBILITY

Reviewed drawings which are required to be resubmitted to correct comments or notations indicating where the shop drawings are at variance with the contract documents, are to be modified and resubmitted to the reviewer for re-review.  Allow 5 working days for re-review by the reviewer.

1.9 RESUBMISSION OF SHOP DRAWINGS

Before proceeding with any fabrication, installation or erection, advice must be obtained from the named reviewers that work may proceed.  Where no named reviewer has been nominated advice must be obtained from the contract administrator.

1.10 WORK MAY PROCEED

1.11 BIM MODEL

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS Page 11

Page 12: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

BIM (Building Information Model) is being used for the construction of the works. Refer to SELECTIONS for details of the BIM model and the information required to be included.

2 SELECTIONS

Submit the shop drawings in the following format 2.1 SHOP DRAWING FORMAT

  Format/Size Hardcopy A3 Electronic copy PDF    

~ 2.2 BIM (BUILDING INFORMATION MODEL) FORMAT

Schedule of shop drawings

3 SCHEDULES

The following work sections have shop drawing requirements, refer to these sections for details:  

3.1 SCHEDULE OF SHOP DRAWINGS

4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows & Doors  

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS Page 12

Page 13: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1237 WARRANTIES

  This general section refers to the requirements for warranties/guarantees as listed in this section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project.  It includes:

� Warranties for parts of the work required by the principal in a required form � Installer/applicator warranties for parts of the work in the installer's/applicator's standard form � Manufacturer/supplier warranties provided with products, appliances and the like in the

manufacturer's/supplier's standard form � Guarantees provided by contractor in the contractor's standard form

  These guarantees/warranties are in addition to any warranties, implied warranties, or guarantees that are required by the Building Act, the Building Regulations, or the building consent.

Warranties

1 GENERAL

Provide executed warranties in favour of the principal in respect of, but not limited to, materials, components, service, application, installation and finishing called for in that specified section of work.  The terms and conditions of the warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered.  Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability under the terms of the warranty called for in that specified section of work.  

� Conform to the WARRANTY AGREEMENT form included in the specification/conditions of contract. � Commence warranties from the date of practical completion of the contract works (unless otherwise

stated). � Maintain their effectiveness for the times stated. � Provide executed warranties prior to practical completion.

1.1 PROVIDE WARRANTIES

Where installer/applicator warranties are offered covering execution and materials of proprietary products or complete installations, provide such warranties to the contract administrator.  These warranties may be provided in lieu of the warranties that are otherwise required provided that these warranties are subject to similar conditions and periods.   Provide warranties in favour of the principal.  The terms and conditions of such warranties in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered.  Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

1.2 WARRANTIES - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

Where warranties are offered covering materials, equipment, appliances or proprietary products, provide all such warranties to the contract administrator.   Provide warranties in favour of the principal.  The terms and conditions of such warranties in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered.  Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

Submission

1.3 WARRANTIES - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Obtain the warranties from the installers, applicators, manufacturers and suppliers at the earliest possible date and review to ensure that they are correctly filled out and executed.  Where warranties are executed as a deed, ensure that a duplicate copy is provided for execution by the owner/principal.  Keep safe and secure until required for submission.

1.4 REVIEW BY CONTRACTOR

Obtain copies of warranties required as a condition of the building consent in the form required for submission to the BCA.  Keep safe and secure until required at the time of the BCA final inspection and Code Compliance Certificate.

1.5 WARRANTIES - REQUIRED BY BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY

1.6 WARRANTIES - REQUIRED BY CONTRACT

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237 WARRANTIES Page 13

Page 14: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Obtain copies of warranties listed in the contract documents.  Provide all warranties at the same time.  If the project has an operations and maintenance documentation provision, present the warranties with the operations and maintenance information.  If no operations and maintenance documentation provision exists, present the warranties to the contract administrator in a loose-leaf binder with a contents index suitably labelled and including the project name and details.  Provide a title on the binder edge "Warranties for (project name)"

Refer to the contract conditions for any requirement relating to the time for submission for warranties and guarantees. Submit all warranties to the architect no later than the date of the contractor's advice of achieving practical completion.

1.7 WARRANTIES - SUBMISSION NZIA SCC CONTRACT

Weathertightness and watertightness warranty

2 SELECTIONS

A warranty is required from the contractor for a minimum period of 2 years, covering the weathertightness of the complete building envelope and the watertightness of all liquid supply and disposal systems and fittings.  This general warranty is in addition to any specific warranties required.   Provide this warranty in favour of the principal.  The terms and conditions of this warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered.  Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.  

� Conform to the standard form WARRANTY AGREEMENT included in the contract documents. � Commence the warranty from the date of Practical Completion. � Maintain its effectiveness for the time stated.

2.1 WEATHERTIGHTNESS AND WATERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY

Schedule of work section warranties

3 SCHEDULES

The following work sections have warranty and guarantee requirements, refer to these sections for details:  

3.1 SCHEDULE OF WORK SECTION WARRANTIES

4161T Thermakraft Underlays, Foils & DPC   4231HW James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding   4272C Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System   4281RL RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System   4311D Dimond Profiled Metal Roofing   4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows & Doors   4611ME Metro Glasstech Exterior Glazing   4710P Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation   5511LC Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry   5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops   6411J Jacobsen Vinyl Surfacing   6512 Carpet tiles   6700R Resene Painting General   7123KP KemPex Hot & Cold Water System   7411MA Marley Rainwater Disposal Systems   7701 Electrical Basic   7811 Communications Cabling  

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237 WARRANTIES Page 14

Page 15: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

  The principal has entered into a contract (the contract) with the contractor for carrying out the contract works. The warranted works / materials are part of the contract works.   The contractor has agreed to arrange for the provision of a warranty in respect of the warranted works / materials for the warranty period on the terms set out in this warranty.   The warrantor has agreed to provide a warranty in respect of the warranted works / materials for the warranty period on the terms set out in this warranty.

1 WARRANTY AGREEMENT    Contract for: KENNEDY PARK RECEPTION BUILDING   (the contract works)     Contractor: ~   (the contractor)     Principal: NAPIER CITY COUNCIL   (the principal)     Warrantor: ~   (name of contractor, subcontractor or materials supplier)     Warranted works: ~   (the warranted works)     Warranted materials: ~   (the warranted materials)     Warranty period: ~ years from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  The warrantor warrants to the principal that the warranted work performed /materials supplied shall be as required in the contract. If not specified the work shall be of good trade practice with materials and fittings of merchantable quality.   This warranty shall be in addition to and shall not derogate from any manufacturer's warranty or any warranty implied by law, attaching to any part of the warranted works.

2 IT IS HEREBY AGREED

The warrantor agrees that if the warrantor is advised by the principal in writing of any defect in the warranted works / materials within the warranty period for which the warrantor is liable under the terms of this warranty, the warrantor will promptly take steps to remedy the defect / replace defective materials.

2.1 WARRANTOR'S OBLIGATIONS

Any remedial work / replacement of defective materials which the warrantor is liable to undertake / provide under this warranty shall be carried out:

� to the standard required by the contract; and � in a prompt and timely manner; and � without unnecessary inconvenience to any occupants; and � at the warrantor's cost; and � subject to reasonable access being provided to the warrantor for the purpose of carrying out the

remedial work.

2.2 REMEDIAL WORK / REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS

Where the cost of replacement of work and/or materials is out of all proportion to the consequences of the defect, or where the defect may not be reasonably capable of rectification without substantial expense which is out of all proportion to the cost of the contract works, the warrantor may:

� where the defect or defective material is reasonably rectified by repair rather than by replacement, the warrantor's obligation under this warranty shall be only to repair or otherwise make good the defect or

� propose reasonable monetary compensation in lieu of remedying the defect or � propose a combination of both repair and compensation.

2.3 REPAIR, REPLACEMENT AND/OR COMPENSATION

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Page 15

Page 16: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

  The principal must consider the warrantor's reasonable proposals and the parties must endeavour in good faith to reach agreement. Where agreement cannot be reached the dispute shall be resolved in accordance with the disputes clause in this warranty.

If the warrantor fails to promptly, adequately and satisfactorily carry out the remedial work or to propose acceptable repair/compensation, the principal may then arrange for the remedial work to be carried out by others.   If the warrantor fails to promptly, adequately and satisfactorily provide replacement materials or to propose acceptable repair/compensation, the principal may then arrange for the replacement materials to be supplied by others.   The principal must first give the warrantor 10 working days notice to carry out and complete the remedial work / supply replacement materials. If the warrantor does not complete this work / supply replacement materials within the time, the principal must then advise the warrantor in writing that the work will be carried out / materials will be supplied by others.   In such event the warrantor is not released from obligations under this warranty, which continues in full force and effect, except in respect of the defect remedied / materials supplied by the principal or by another person contracted by the principal. The reasonable cost of the remedial work carried out / materials supplied by such other persons including all reasonable costs of the principal is to be paid to the principal by the warrantor on demand.

2.4 FAILURE BY WARRANTOR TO PERFORM REMEDIAL WORK

The principal agrees that the warrantor is not liable for any defect or damage caused by: � wilful act or negligence of the principal or any person other than the warrantor; or � fire, explosion, earthquake, war, subsidence, slips, faulty materials or workmanship other than caused

by the defect in the warranted work; or � any force of nature which the warrantor could not reasonably foresee; or � any neglect or unnecessary delay by the principal in giving notice to the warrantor of a defect in the

warranted works becoming apparent; or � design faults, errors or discrepancies, unless the warrantor undertook the design of the part of the

warranted works the subject of the defect; or � unintended use of the warranted works by the principal or any occupant thereof; or � failure by the principal or any occupant thereof to maintain the warranted works in accordance with

good practice and any manufacturer's stated or recommended instructions or requirements.

2.5 EXCLUSIONS

The principal may assign the benefit of this warranty to any person. 2.6 ASSIGNMENT

Any dispute or difference between the principal and the warrantor arising out of or in connection with this warranty, or the subject matter of this warranty, including any question about its existence or validity, will be referred to arbitration by a sole arbitrator to be agreed upon by the parties.  If the parties are unable to agree upon the identity of an arbitrator within 10 working days from the date upon which notice of the dispute is given, then the arbitrator will be appointed by the Registrar of the Building Disputes Tribunal (NZ) Ltd upon the application of either party.

2.7 DISPUTES

Notices given to the warrantor are deemed to have been effectively served on the warrantor if given in accordance with the contract.

2.8 NOTICES

 

  (And where required to be executed as a deed) signed in the presence of:  

3 EXECUTED BY

Signed by the warrantor: ………………………………………..……………………...         on this: …………….day of ……………………………..…20……               (day)             (month)             (year)  

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Page 16

Page 17: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

  (And where required to be executed as a deed) signed in the presence of:  

  NOTE - Where the warrantor is not the contractor the warranty agreement must be executed by the warrantor and the principal in the manner required for execution of a deed.   Any of these parties which are a company must execute the warranty by having it signed, under the name of the company, by two or more directors. If there is only one director, it is sufficient if the warranty agreement is signed under the name of the company by that director, but the signature must be witnessed by another person. The witness must not only sign but must also add his or her occupation and address. Alternatively, companies may execute under power of attorney. Any party which is a body corporate (other than a company) must execute by affixing its seal, which must be attested in the manner provided for in the rules of, or applicable to, the body corporate.   In the case of a party who is an individual, the party must sign and the signature must be witnessed by another person. The witness must not only sign but must also add his or her occupation and address.

Witness signature ……………………………………………………………...         Name: ……………………………………………………………...     (print)   Address: ……………………………………………………………...     (print)   Occupation: ……………………………………………………………...     (print)   Signed by the principal: ……………………………………………………………...         on this: …………….day of ……………………………..…20……              (day)             (month)             (year)  

Witness signature ……………………………………………………………...         Name: ……………………………………………………………...     (print)   Address: ……………………………………………………………...     (print)   Occupation: ……………………………………………………………...     (print)  

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Page 17

Page 18: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

This general section relates to operation and maintenance (O&M) documentation as listed in this section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project.  This documentation is required by the principal so that they can operate and maintain the contract works.

Operation and maintenance documents

1 GENERAL

Provide in writing the information and documentation prescribed by regulations made under the Building Act, to the owner/principal and the relevant territorial authority.

1.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION - BUILDING ACT

Provide operation and maintenance documentation necessary to operate and maintain the works.  This documentation is to include:

� Contractors name and contact details. � A complete list of subcontractors' names, addresses and telephone numbers noting which portions of

the contract each provided. � A complete list of equipment and appliances including serial numbers, manufacturers' names and

sources of supply. � Copies of all manufacturers' and suppliers' product literature containing maintenance

requirements/instructions, for any products in the building work. � Information for operation and maintenance as required by work sections. Refer to SCHEDULES. � Operation and maintenance manuals as required by work sections.  Refer to SCHEDULES. � Maintenance contract proposals as required by work sections.  Refer to SCHEDULES. � Final as built documents. � Originals of all warranties and guarantees properly executed. � Other information listed or referred to in this general section. � Operation and maintenance information required by other project documents.

1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Provide details of any maintenance requirements required by the Building Act.  In addition provide maintenance requirements for items including:

� Details of suggested building washing programme. � Details of suggested re-painting programme. � Location of flushing points for sub soil drainage systems. � Location of surface water filter systems requiring regular cleaning. � Overflow relief gully location and means of keeping charged.

1.3 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Provide appliance manuals and operating information for all appliances including details of all isolating valves and switches including:

� Water supply isolating valve. � Location of isolating valves for appliances including dishwasher, clothes washer and fridge with and

icemaker connection. � Gas supply isolating valve. � Electrical main switch and all sub boards. � Location of isolating switches for electrical appliances including cooker and cook top, kitchen extract

system, electric under floor heating. � Fire and heating device operating instructions.

1.4 APPLIANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide equipment and appliance manuals and operating information including details of all isolating valves and switches.

1.5 EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide details of actual selections used in the construction of the works including: � Tapware type and supplier details. � Sanitary ware including accessories type and supplier details. � Light fitting type and supplier details. � Door hardware type and supplier details. � Carpet type and colour including underlay and the supplier details. � Vinyl flooring type and colour including supplier details. � Overlay timber floor type and supplier details. � Tile type and supplier details. � Fire supplier details.

1.6 SELECTIONS INFORMATION

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 18

Page 19: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

� Aluminium joinery system and finish. � Paint type and colours used.

  Include brochures and other information included with the items supplied.

Provide details of any selections used in the construction of the works that are different from what was specified.

Documentation format

1.7 SELECTIONS INFORMATION - SUBSTITUTIONS

Unless otherwise specified in a work section, � Provide O&M drawings at scales appropriate to the detail to enable good legibility. � Provide manufacturers documentation at the original scale. � Provide written text generally in A4 format using a font not less than 10 point.

  Submit O&M documentation in both hard copy and as electronic portable document format (PDF) files.

Submission and review

1.8 O&M DOCUMENTATION FORMAT

Unless otherwise specified in a work section, provide draft O&M documentation no later than the date of practical completion or the date on which the principal takes occupation of the works, whichever occurs first.   Submit O&M documentation to the named reviewer for review.

� Where no time is stated in a specific section, allow 10 working days for review by the reviewer.  Where a large amount of documentation is involved more time will be necessary.

� Where no person is named in a specific section as the reviewer, submit the O&M documents to the contract administrator.

� Submit a proposed index system (as required for final documentation) to the contract administrator for review.

  O&M review indicates only that the reviewer is satisfied that the documents are legible.  The review is not a check of the accuracy of the documents, however the reviewer may comment on any aspect of the documentation and require the documents to be revised and resubmitted.  Review of operation and maintenance documentation does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the correctness of the documentation.   The reviewer may advise that:

� The O&M documentation has been reviewed and has been accepted without the need for further modification. The information can be included in the final documentation; or

� The O&M documentation has been reviewed and the information can be included in the final documentation subject to revision required by notes, annotations or comments provided; or

� The O&M documentation has been reviewed and is not acceptable, refer to notes, annotations or comments provided.  Resubmit corrected/altered documentation for review.

  Amalgamate the reviewed accepted and corrected O&M documentation into the final O&M documentation

Final documentation

1.9 O&M DOCUMENTATION SUBMISSION & REVIEW

Prior to the end of the defects notification/liability period, provide complete O&M documentation in both hardcopy and electronic form.

1.10 SUBMISSION OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION

Provide the hard copy version of the O&M documentation in a loose-leaf binder with a contents index identifying operation and maintenance documents, requirements, manuals, operating instructions and selections.  In addition include the project name, contractor's name and the date of practical completion on the index page.   Include indexed sections to identify all operation and maintenance manuals that are not contained within the binder.  Provide a copy of the front cover or other identifying feature of the manual within the section with a note stating "this manual has been provided separately".   Provide a title on the binder edge "Operation and maintenance instructions for (project name)".  If more than one binder is required identify each binder by number and ranking (e.g.  Volume 2 of 3) and group information logically between the binders for ease of reference.  

1.11 FINAL O&M DOCUMENTATION - HARDCOPY

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 19

Page 20: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Provide operation and maintenance manuals clearly and neatly marked on the spine or front cover so as to identify the project name.  Where operation and maintenance manuals are a collection of loose leaf documentation, provide documentation in a loose-leaf binder as described above.

Provide a copy of all hardcopy information in PDF format arranged in logical named folders. In addition provide DWG files of documentation if available.

1.12 FINAL O&M INFORMATION - ELECTRONIC COPY

The contract administrator may review the final documentation and require alteration and resubmission. 1.13 REVIEW OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION

O&M Documentation

2 SELECTIONS

Provide a complete electronic copy to the contract administrator.   Provide two hardcopy sets of completed O&M documentation to the contract administrator. At least one set is to contain all available original documentation.  The contractor is to retain a third hardcopy set for their records.   Provide any documentation (including required original documentation) as required to the relevant territorial authority.

2.1 FINAL DOCUMENTATION - INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Provide a complete electronic copy to the contract administrator.   Provide two hardcopy sets of completed maintenance manuals to the contract administrator. At least one set is to contain all available original documentation.  The contractor is to retain a third hardcopy set for their records.   Provide any documentation (including required original documentation) as required to the relevant territorial authority.

Maintenance contract proposals

2.2 FINAL DOCUMENTATION - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Unless otherwise specified in a work section, provide maintenance contract proposals to the contract administrator no later than the date of Practical Completion.  Provide in electronic and hardcopy form.

2.3 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT PROPOSALS

Schedule of information for operation and maintenance

3 SCHEDULES

The following work sections have information for operation and maintenance requirements; refer to these sections for details:  

Schedule of operation and maintenance manuals

3.1 SCHEDULE OF INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

4231HW James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding   4281RL RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System   5311F Forman Suspended Tile Ceiling Systems   5313F Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling Systems   5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops   6700R Resene Painting General  

There are no work section requirements.

Schedule of maintenance contract proposals

3.2 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

There are no work section requirements.

Schedule of additional items

3.3 SCHEDULE OF MAINTENANCE CONTRACT PROPOSALS

3.4 SCHEDULE OF ADDITIONAL ITEMS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 20

Page 21: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

The following documents have operation and maintenance requirements, refer to these documents for details: ~

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 21

Page 22: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1240 ESTABLISHMENT

  This general section relates to site establishment including:

� Notices and approvals � Inspections � Site preparation � Signage � Temporary construction

Notices and approvals

1 GENERAL

Comply with all statutory obligations and regulations of regulatory bodies controlling the execution of the works.

1.1 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS

Attend on Building Consent Authority officers, statutory and network utility inspectors, as necessary to obtain approvals (in addition to building consent approval) for and the satisfactory completion of, the works.

1.2 BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY AND NETWORK UTILITY APPROVALS

Notify all network utility operators of proposed works before commencing site operations.  Ascertain location of services or confirm that none exist in the vicinity of the works.  Take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing services.

Inspections

1.3 NOTIFY NETWORK UTILITY OPERATORS

~

Site preparation

1.4 CARRY OUT INSPECTIONS

Access to the site is limited to: ~ 1.5 SITE ACCESS

Limited to the following designated working areas on the site: ~

1.6 WORKING AREA

Carry out all investigations necessary and peruse all information available to determine ground conditions and likely ground performance both on the site and adjacent to it.  Also refer to the territorial authority project information memorandum (PIM).

1.7 SITE AND SOIL SURVEYS

Refer to the soils investigation report included with this specification.

Existing buildings

1.8 GROUND CONDITIONS

Control access and working areas within existing buildings.  Liaise with building owner to establish site limitations.

1.9 ALTERATIONS

Liaise with the building owner to arrange access to areas of the existing building which are not normally part of the contract.

Signage

1.10 TEMPORARY ACCESS

Obtain approval for, provide and erect a timber framed sign board ~mm x ~mm fully painted and displaying: � Title of contract � Principal's name � Contractor's name � Consultants as listed in general section 1222 PROJECT PERSONNEL � If the contractor wishes, names of contractor and subcontractors.

1.11 SITE SIGN

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1240 ESTABLISHMENT Page 22

Page 23: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Temporary construction

Provide as necessary all temporary roads, tracks, crossings and hard standing required for the efficient execution of the works and maintain to approval.

1.12 TEMPORARY ROADS

Provide as necessary temporary sheds, offices, lunch rooms, sanitary accommodation and other temporary buildings required for storage, management of the works, for the use of workers while on site and as required by Acts and Regulations.

1.13 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS

Provide temporary accommodation and facilities for site meetings and for use by consultants while on site. 1.14 CONSULTANTS TEMPORARY SITE OFFICE

Provide temporary fencing, hoardings, planked footways, guard rails, gantries and lighting as necessary to protect the public and others, for the proper execution of the works and to meet the requirements of territorial or other authority.

1.15 HOARDINGS, GANTRIES, LIGHTING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1240 ESTABLISHMENT Page 23

Page 24: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

  This general section relates to project management requirements including:

� Meetings � Cost control � Communicating and recording � Programming � Health and safety

Site Meetings

1 GENERAL

Meetings to normally be held: Fortnightly   The following persons to attend:

� Principal � Contract administrator � Project manager � Contractor � Architect � Designer � Engineer � Quantity surveyor � Services consultants when needed � Subcontractors when needed (contractor to inform them).

 

1.1 SITE MEETINGS

Meeting place: ~ Time: ~ Day: ~

The contract administrator is to keep full minutes of all site meetings and arrange distribution to all those involved within 3 working days.   The minutes are to record

� Documentation and information issued and required � Directions and variations issued � Confirmation of contract insurances � Programme � General business � Site health and safety � Payment claim processing including costing variations

Project Control Group (PCG) meetings

1.2 SITE MEETING MINUTES

1.3 PCG MEETINGS

Frequency: Monthly Convenor: Project manager / Principal

The purpose of PCG meetings is to: � To consider matters arising from the regular site meetings that fall outside of the scope of those

meetings. � To address issues relating to project delivery including quality, programme and cost.

1.4 PURPOSE OF PCG

The following persons to attend: � Principal � Contract administrator � Project manager � Contractor � Architect � Engineer � Quantity surveyor � Other consultants

1.5 PCG ATTENDANCE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 24

Page 25: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1.6 VENUE PCG

Meeting place: ~ Time: ~ Day: ~

The following reports are required to be presented at site meetings:   Contract administrator:

1.7 PCG REPORTING

  A report on matters addressed at the site meetings Contractor: A detail status report Quantity surveyor: A Detail status report

The designated person is to keep full minutes of all PCG meetings and arrange distribution to all those involved within 5 working days.

Design meetings

1.8 PCG MINUTES

1.9 DESIGN MEETINGS

Frequency: Monthly Convenor: Design manager

The purpose of design meetings is to: � To consider matters arising from design by the contractor in relation to parts of the work being carried

out on a design build or performance specification basis by the contractor � To review and assess design aspects of such work on other designed parts of the work � To provide value engineering advice on parts of the work where design changes are required or are

being considered to meet the project financial performance requirements

1.10 PURPOSE OF DESIGN MEETINGS

The following persons to attend: � Principal � Contract administrator � Project manager � Contractor � Architect � Engineer � Quantity surveyor � Other consultants

1.11 DESIGN MEETING ATTENDANCE

1.12 VENUE OF DESIGN MEETINGS

Meeting place: ~ Time: ~ Day: ~

The designated design manager is to keep full minutes of all design meetings and arrange distribution to all those involved within 5 working days.

Reporting

1.13 DESIGN MEETING MINUTES

Where required a Contractors detailed status report is to address the following: � A progress performance report based on the current contract construction programme addressing

actual progress against programme of all activities and any variance from the programme. � Details of measures being taken to get work back on programme where there has been a delay. � Details of any future events that will or are likely to affect compliance with the programme. � Variation report including progress on agreed variations, variations to be agreed and anticipated

variations and the time implication of variations. � Procurement progress on parts of the work being undertaken under a monetary allowance including the

time by which direction must be given on monetary allowances to conform with the construction programme.

� Details of any discrepancies in the contract documents that require clarification or determination. � A list of information requests by the contractor, the date when they were made, the person who they

were directed to and the date by which a response is required. � A report on compliance with the issued Building Consent and any parts of the work that have not been

1.14 CONTRACTORS DETAILED STATUS REPORT

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 25

Page 26: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

passed by the BCA inspector. � A report on compliance with the issued Resource Consent and any compliance issues. � A report of site health and safety including any notifiable incidents.

Where required a quantity surveyors detailed status report is to address the following:  

� A report on actual cash flow compared with planned cash flow � Variation costing and the adjusted contract price � Monetary allowance review of sums not yet directed for expenditure by the contractor � An assessment of the cost of known and potential variations � An updated project budget including known and projected costs plus an allowance for contingent and

unknown costs.

1.15 QUANTITY SURVEYORS DETAILED STATUS REPORT

Where required a consultants detailed status report is to address the following:  

� A report on construction quality compared to specification and other performance requirements. � Identification of items or parts of the work where there are or may be quality compliance issues with

respect to the issued Building Consent � Identification of items or parts of the work where there are or may be quality compliance issues with

respect to the ability of the consultant to issue any required producer statement.

Cost control

1.16 CONSULTANTS DETAILED STATUS REPORT

Give reasonable notice to the contract administrator before covering up work which requires to be measured. 1.17 MEASUREMENT

To be signed by the contractor's representative as confirming the labour, times and materials used, before being supplied to the contract administrator.

Communicating and recording

1.18 DAYWORK VOUCHERS

Communications between the parties shall be as follows: - 1.19 MEANS OF COMMUNICATION

Directions: In writing delivered by email with a copy by post or hand Meeting minutes: In writing delivered by email RFI's: (Requests for information) by email or in writing to the contract

administrator

Communications must be: - � delivered to the addressee by hand; or � posted to the postal address stated in the Project Directory; or � delivered to the street address as stated in the Project Directory; or � sent by email to the email address stated in the Project Directory; or � sent by facsimile to the fax number stated in the Project Directory.

  The Principal, Contractor and the Contract administrator must notify the others if they change their address for delivery or transmission of communications.

1.20 DELIVERY OF COMMUNICATIONS

Ensure all records specified are kept, held and collated on site in a form that makes the information easily accessible when it is needed.  Distribute copies as and when necessary to those persons entitled under the contract to that information.

1.21 RECORDS

Take digital photographs from positions agreed with the contract administrator at specified frequency and provide copies to the contract administrator.  

Programming

1.22 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

Frequency: Monthly Copies required: 1 set colour prints not less than postcard size   1 electronic copy delivered on disk or by email

1.23 CONTRACT PROGRAMME

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 26

Page 27: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Include the proposed sequence of all significant on-site and off-site activities, including any intermediate key dates mentioned in the contract.  Identify the critical path.  Provide a tabulated schedule of information for each activity in order of:  

� brief description � duration in suitable time unit � earliest start and latest finish time � total float � key dates for the supply of information or materials by others.

Identify the dates by which particular information, material or plant need to be supplied or arranged by the contract administrator.  Also identify any constraints which may have been imposed by the programme.   Supply copies of the programme to the following:

  Monitor the contract programme by:

� recording progress regularly on the site chart � informing the contract administrator promptly of any circumstances affecting any part of the programme

structure and timing � reviewing the programme once a month making alterations as needed and agreed to and re-issuing the

required copies.

Contract administrator 1 Architect 1 Designer 1 Owner 1 Quantity surveyor 1 Site supervisor 1

Work on site is not restricted.  Comply with territorial authority consent conditions and noise and nuisance controls.

1.24 WORKING HOURS

Work on site is restricted to:

  Work outside these hours may be permitted, but 24 hours notice is required in writing to the contract administrator before proceeding.  Obtain any necessary permits and permission for such work.

Health and safety

1.25 WORKING HOURS RESTRICTIONS

Weekdays: ~ Saturdays: ~ Sundays: ~ Public holidays: ~

Refer to the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992.  Comply with all relevant New Zealand safety legislation.   Take all practical steps to make the site and the contract works safe and to provide and maintain a safe working environment.  Ensure that all those working on or visiting the site are aware of the rules governing site safety, are properly supervised and are not unnecessarily exposed to hazards.   Identify any significant hazards.   Maintain proper procedures for dealing with any emergencies that may arise.  Immediately investigate accidents, identify their cause and maintain a register of accidents and serious harm.  Provide a copy of any report which the contractor is required to make to a public authority on any accident which is associated with carrying out the contract works and results in serious harm to any person.   Refer to individual work sections for detailed requirements on this project.

1.26 HEALTH AND SAFETY

On the request of the contract administrator, acting on reasonable grounds, suspend any identified hazardous activities and proceed to eliminate, isolate or minimise them in order to comply with the Act, without prejudice to any other rights of the principal under the contract.

1.27 SUSPENSION OF HAZARDOUS WORK

Appoint a suitably qualified site safety person to co-ordinate site safety and to attend all site meetings. 1.28 SITE SAFETY PERSON

1.29 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 27

Page 28: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Prepare and submit to the contract administrator before commencing work on site a health and safety plan.  Include in that plan all people on site and the general public, as well as the following items and any other necessary item:

� identification of existing and potential construction hazards and risks � safety procedures to eliminate, isolate or minimise construction hazards � the equipment to be used to minimise the hazards � the maintenance of a register of hazards for the site � the name and qualifications of the site safety person � emergency procedures � first aid facilities and safety equipment � the methodology for notifying, recording and investigating accidents and injuries.

  Keep a copy of the plan in the site office

Carry out all construction operations in accordance with the submitted health and safety plan. 1.30 COMPLY WITH SITE SAFETY PLAN

Inform employees and others on the site of: � hazards they may be exposed to while working � hazards they may create while working which could harm others � how these hazards may be minimised � emergency procedures � the location of first aid facilities and safety equipment.

1.31 INFORM EMPLOYEES OF HAZARDS

Comply with: � Relevant New Zealand safety legislation including "Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995". � WorkSafe NZ publications including "Guidelines for the provision of facilities for general safety in the

construction industry". � Relevant codes of practice, guides, guidelines and standards.

  Until further regulations are made under the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 to cover them, the enactments repealed by the Act continue in force until revoked.

1.32 HEALTH AND SAFETY REGULATIONS, CODES AND GUIDES

Do not use explosives except with the written approval of the territorial authority/WorkSafe NZ.  Comply with their safety requirements and use construction blasters holding a current certificate of competence issued under the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.

1.33 EXPLOSIVES

Powder-actuated fastening tools to be used only by workers holding current certificates of competence in their name, issued under the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.

1.34 POWDER-ACTUATED FASTENING TOOLS

Do not smoke on site except in a designated location, in accordance with the Smoke Free Environments Act 1990.  This location to be determined by the contractor with the agreement of the contract administrator.

1.35 SMOKE FREE REQUIREMENTS

Do not: � light rubbish fires on the site � bring dogs on to or near the site � bring radios/audio players on to the site.

1.36 RESTRICTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 28

Page 29: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

1270 CONSTRUCTION

This GENERAL section relates to common requirements for construction issues including: - � Quality assurance � Noise and nuisance � Set out � Common execution requirements � Common materials requirements � Supply of spare materials � Common requirements for samples and tests � Final presentation and cleaning � Commissioning

Quality control and assurance

1 GENERAL

Carry out and record regular checks of material quality and accuracy, including: � Concrete quality and finish. � Dimensional accuracy of structural column locations (following completion of foundations). � All perimeter columns and frames for plumb. � Levels of all floors relative to the site datum. � Framing timber moisture content.

  Where any material, quality or dimension falls outside specified or required tolerances, obtain written direction from the contract administrator. Where building consent approval is affected, confirm remedial action with the Building Consent Authority.   Provide all materials, plant, attendances, supervision, inspections and programming to ensure the required quality standards are met by all project personnel.

Noise and nuisance

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Minimise the effects of noise generation by including in the planning of the work such factors as placing of plant, programming the sequence of operations and other management functions.  Limit construction noise to comply with the requirements of NZS 6803, the requirements of the Resource Management Act sections 326, 327 and 328 and the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations clause 11.

1.2 LIMIT CONSTRUCTION NOISE

Refer to NZS 6803 Tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3 for the upper limits of construction work noise in residential and industrial areas over the various time periods, particularly 0730 to 1800 hours.  Note also the allowed adjustments and exemptions in NZS 6803, 6.  Do not exceed these limits.

1.3 ACCEPTABLE NOISE LEVELS

Provide information to neighbours of any noise generation from the site liable to constitute a problem. Explain to them the means being used to minimise excessive noise and establish with them the timings most suitable for the noise generating work to be carried on.   Discuss with any complainant the measures being used to minimise noise. Where possible modify these measures to accommodate particular circumstances. Finally, determine the sound level at the location under discussion using methods and observation reporting as laid down in NZS 6803. If the noise level is above the upper limits of NZS 6803, tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3, cease the noise generating operation and remedy the problem.

1.4 PROVIDE INFORMATION TO NEIGHBOURS

As well as complying with the preceding clauses comply with the following on this contract: ~

1.5 ADDITIONAL NOISE CONSTRAINTS

When the works are to be carried out in or around occupied premises, ascertain the nature and times of occupation and use.  Carry out the works in a manner to minimise inconvenience, nuisance and danger to occupants and users.

1.6 INCONVENIENCE TO OTHERS

Remove dirt and droppings deposited on public or private thoroughfares from vehicles servicing the site to the satisfaction of the appropriate authorities and the contract administrator.

1.7 DIRT AND DROPPINGS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 29

Page 30: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Take all precautions to prevent damage and nuisance from water, fire, smoke, dust, rubbish and all other causes resulting from the construction works.

Set-out and tolerances

1.8 DAMAGE AND NUISANCE

Locate and verify survey marks and datum points required to set out the works.  Record and maintain their position.  Re-establish and replace disturbed or obliterated marks.

1.9 SURVEY INFORMATION

Set out the work to conform with the drawings.  Establish a permanent site datum to confirm the proposed building ground floor level and its relationship to all other existing and new building levels.

1.10 SET-OUT AND DATUM

Before commencing construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate prepared by a licensed cadastral surveyor that the set-out is complete and that the building is accurately placed on the site.   During construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate, prepared by the same licensed cadastral surveyor confirming the set-out of the foundations and grid lines. Necessary adjustments are to be determined and agreed to by the contract administrator before proceeding further.

1.11 SET-OUT BY LICENSED CADASTRAL SURVEYOR

Provide a certificate prepared by a licensed cadastral surveyor that the building has been constructed within the allowed height in relation to boundary.  Provide the certificate to the local authority.  Provide a copy of the certificate to the contract administrator

1.12 CONFIRM HEIGHT IN RELATION TO BOUNDARY

Permit without charge, the use of instruments already on site for checking, setting out and levels. 1.13 USE OF SET-OUT INSTRUMENTS

Check all dimensions both on drawings and site, particularly the correlation between components and work in place.  Take all dimensions on drawings to be between structural elements before linings or finishes, unless clearly stated otherwise.

1.14 CHECK DIMENSIONS

All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Unless otherwise specified in specific work sections of this specification, tolerances for structural work shall comply with the following:  

  Refer to work sections for tolerance requirements for finishes.

Execution

1.15 TOLERANCES

Concrete construction: To NZS 3109 Concrete construction Clause 3.9 Tolerances for reinforcement Table 5.1 Tolerance for precast components Table 5.2 Tolerance for in situ construction To NZS 3114 Concrete surface finishes

Masonry construction: To NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and workmanship Clause 2.6.5 Tolerances Table 2.2 Maximum tolerances

Structural steelwork: To NZS 3404:1997 Steel structures standard Section 14.4 Tolerances (after fabrication) Section 15.3 Tolerances (erection)

Timber framing: To NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings Clause 2.2 Tolerances Table 2.1 Timber framing tolerances

Before commencing any part of the work carefully examine the previous work on which it may depend.  Report in writing to the contract administrator defects that may affect the quality of the proposed work and obtain instructions.  Commencing work on any part means that previous work is accepted as being satisfactory for work of the required standard.

1.16 EXAMINE PREVIOUS WORK

All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face.  Employ only experienced workers familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

1.17 WORKER QUALIFICATIONS

1.18 MINIMISE DELAYS DUE TO WEATHER

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 30

Page 31: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Use appropriate techniques and methods to prevent damage and minimise delays due to weather.

Materials

Materials and products to be new unless stated otherwise, of the specified standard, and complying with all cited documents.

1.19 NEW PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Ensure all parts of a construction or finish are compatible and their individual use approved by the manufacturers and suppliers of other parts of the system.  Source all parts of a system from a single manufacturer or supplier.

1.20 COMPATIBILITY OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES

Take delivery of and store products, materials and components in accordance with codes of practice and the product manufacturer's or supplier's stated requirements.  Maintain the proper condition of any protective packaging, wrappings or supports during delivery, unloading and storage.

1.21 STORING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Handle products, materials and components in accordance with codes of practice and the manufacturer's or supplier's stated guidelines.  Avoid distortion and any contact with potentially damaging surfaces or conditions.

1.22 HANDLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Ensure substrate conditions are within the manufacturer's or supplier's stated guidelines both before and during the installation of any material, product or system.  Obtain written instructions on the necessary action to rectify unsatisfactory conditions.

1.23 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS

Install in accordance with the manufacturer's or supplier's technical literature.  Ensure that all installers are familiar with the required substrate conditions and the manufacturer's or supplier's specified preparation, fixing and finishing techniques.

1.24 INSTALLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Comply with the relevant and/or cited Standard for any material or component.  Obtain certificates of compliance when requested by the contract administrator.

1.25 COMPLY WITH STANDARDS

To be in perfect condition when incorporated into the work. 1.26 CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Separate incompatible materials and metals with separation layers, sleeves or gaskets of plastic film, bituminous felt or mastic or paint coatings, installed so that none are visible on exposed surfaces.

Samples and tests

1.27 INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS AND METALS

Where specified in the work sections, submit samples, prepare sample panels, and construct prototypes for review as to appearance, form and conformance with the drawings and specifications. Submit all information required to assist the review process, including technical data, manufacturer's literature, independent appraisals and producer statements.   Timing for the provision and review of samples, sample panels and prototypes to be included in the contract programme. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for each review. Proceed only after instructions to proceed have been issued in writing by the contract administrator.   In situ work may be incorporated in the finished work if so confirmed, otherwise allow to remove completely and replace.

1.28 SAMPLES AND PROTOTYPES

Obtain the contract administrator's confirmation of material, component and work samples which then become the quality control standard.  Remove from the site any rejected samples.  Retain confirmed samples with care on site for comparison throughout the contract.  Remove from the site when no longer required.

Spares

1.29 CONTROL STANDARD

Collect, protect and store safely all spare materials required under the contract.  Give the contract administrator an inventory of all spares.

Final presentation and cleaning

1.30 SPARES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 31

Page 32: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Remove all temporary markings, coverings, labels and protective wrappings unless instructed otherwise. 1.31 REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION

Replace all materials or component damaged during the works to the standard of and integral with the original.1.32 REPLACE DAMAGED MATERIALS

Ensure all services are complete and operational, with all temporary labelling removed, required labelling fixed and service instructions provided.

1.33 COMPLETE ALL SERVICES

Clear the contract works of all construction materials, waste, dirt and debris.  Clean the contract works including:

� Wipe all surfaces to remove construction dust � Clean out service ducts and accessible concealed spaces � Clean out all gutters and rainwater heads � Wipe dust from both sides of glass.  Take particular care when removing paint or cementitious materials

to not damage the glass. � Remove adhesive residue left by labels and other temporary protection/markings � Clean out the interior of all cabinetry � Wash down external concrete including driveways and concrete masonry.  Take care when

waterblasting to not cause damage to the surface or allow water to enter the building. � Remove rubbish and building material from the area immediately adjacent to the contract works

1.34 CLEANING BY CONTRACTOR

Use a commercial cleaning firm to clean the whole of the interior of the building, including all appliances, equipment, fittings, surfaces and finishes to leave it without any blemish.  Cleaning to include:

� Clean and wash down all external surfaces to remove dirt, debris and marking. � Clean all interior surfaces including cabinetwork, joinery, sanitary and hardware items. � Vacuum or polish all floor finishes. � Clean and polish all glass, both sides.

Commissioning

1.35 CLEANING BY COMMERCIAL CLEANER

Adjust, ease and lubricate all doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances, controls and all moving parts to give easy and efficient operation.

1.36 MOVING PARTS

~ 1.37 TESTS AND CERTIFICATION

Remove any temporary lock cylinders and complete final keying prior to handing over keys to the principal on completion of the works.  Leave the works secure with all accesses locked.  Account for all keys/cards/codes and hand to the principal along with an itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate schedule signed by the principal as a receipt.

1.38 SECURITY AT COMPLETION

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 32

Page 33: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

2110 DEMOLITION WORKS

  This section relates to the demolition of existing buildings and structures in whole or in part, to the extent necessary to carry out the new work.  Refer to drawing 1535 GA.10 New Site Plan for clarification on scope that falls under each of two phases of operation. Demolition includes part of the existing timber framed residential building and its supporting concrete slab, all of the current reception building, the garage beside the current reception building, and removal of the concrete slab following removal of the existing Versatile garage.  Adequate site visits are required to assist in pricing these works.  Asbestos may be present in the garage beside the existing reception building.

1 GENERAL

Refer to 1234 Documentation - Building Consent Requirements Refer to 1260 Project Management - Health and Safety clauses

1.1 RELATED WORK

Documents referred to in this section are:

Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards NZS 6803 Acoustics - Construction noise NZDAA Best practice guidelines for demolition in New Zealand NZDAA New Zealand guidelines for the management and removal of asbestos

Carry out demolition only under the supervision of a suitably experienced person and using only experienced operators and drivers.  Use only experienced, certified, construction blasters for explosives demolition.

1.3 QUALIFICATION

Refer to NZS 6803, tables 2 and 3 for the allowable upper limits of construction work noise in residential, commercial and industrial areas over the various time periods.  Use silenced and noise insulated plant to ensure compliance with these requirements.

1.4 NOISE

Take all precautions necessary to minimise nuisance caused by dust, dirt, rubbish and water. 1.5 NUISANCE

Comply with the Health and Safety in Employment Act in general, NZBC F5/AS1 and NZDAA Best practice guidelines for demolition in New Zealand, section 5 Demolition Safety.

1.6 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Demolition work to be carried out to building consent requirements 1.7 BUILDING CONSENT REQUIREMENTS

Inspection of the demolition work to take place at each of the stages as scheduled in the building consent.  Confirm a written programme to facilitate these inspections, including notification when each stage of the work is ready for inspection. Allow 48 hours advanced notice for the inspections. Obtain and pay for any required inspections which are additional to the building consent.

1.8 INSPECTIONS

Before commencing work, carry out a thorough survey and examination of all buildings or structures to be demolished in order to ensure the extent, sequence, technique and method of demolition proposed can be safely and efficiently carried out. Take photographs of the works, adjacent buildings and sites, before commencing work. Provide a set of these photographs as a record of existing condition.

1.9 SURVEY

Before commencing demolition, arrange with all utility network operators to disconnect services and remove fittings and equipment.  Pay all fees and charges for this work.

1.10 SERVICES

Material from the demolition becomes the property of the contractor except where expressly provided otherwise.  Remove redundant materials from the site as work proceeds.

1.11 MATERIAL

Designated items remain the property of the owner. 1.12 SALVAGE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 2110 DEMOLITION WORKS Page 33

Page 34: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Burning of materials is not permitted on site. 1.13 BURNING OF MATERIALS

2 PRODUCTS

Carefully dismantle, remove and store on site where directed.  Protect from damage and weather until required.

2.1 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE OR RE-USE

3 EXECUTION

Comply with the requirements of NZDAA Best practice guidelines for demolition in New Zealand.  Submit a written demolition plan to the requirements of section 4.7, Demolition plan (method statement).

3.1 DEMOLITION GENERALLY

Support and protect adjoining property.  Survey adjoining properties and take all precautionary measures necessary to avoid damage or nuisance.  Copy of the survey results to be sent to adjoining property owners.

3.2 ADJOINING PROPERTY

Protect retained parts of existing buildings, the site and site structures, trees and shrubs.  Take care in the cutting away and stripping out to reduce the amount of making good.

3.3 PROTECT

Support and brace the existing structure during the cutting of new openings or the replacement of structural parts.  Prevent debris from overloading any part of the structure.  Do not remove supports until the new work is strong enough to support the existing structure.  Ensure all work remains structurally stable and sound.

3.4 SUPPORT

Erect approved screens wherever penetration of weather, dust and dirt needs to be prevented.  Adjust screens as work proceeds.

3.5 TEMPORARY SCREENS

Prevent access by unauthorised persons.  Illuminate and protect all holes, unsafe buildings and other hazards.  Leave site and buildings safe at the close of each day's work.

3.6 SITE SAFETY

Prevent fire or explosion and arrange to alert the appropriate authority where any danger exists. 3.7 FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE CONDITIONS

Demolish buildings and structures down to the existing finished ground level.  Do not remove support to adjacent properties or buildings.

3.8 DEMOLISH

Carry out relocation, to the general requirements of the NZDAA publication: Best Practice Guidelines for Demolition in New Zealand. The building will be relocated by NCC, the slab to be removed as part of this contract.

3.9 RELOCATION OF VERSATILE GARAGE - SEPARATE CONTRACT

Where demolition work includes contact with or removal of material containing asbestos, comply with NZDAA: New Zealand guidelines for the management and removal of asbestos.

3.10 DEMOLITION, ASBESTOS

Dig out foundations, footings, basements, floor slabs, paths, drains, cesspits and manholes that are part of or service the demolished building.  Do not backfill the resulting voids.

3.11 DIG OUT

Carefully dismantle and store safely all salvage items where directed; for removal, use on the site, or until completion of the works.

3.12 SALVAGE

Reinstate and make good demolition damage to adjoining properties, existing work, services, or property. 3.13 REINSTATE AND MAKE GOOD

Take away from the site all plant and equipment, temporary access works and demolished materials and elements.  Leave the site completely clean and tidy.

3.14 TAKE AWAY

4 SELECTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 2110 DEMOLITION WORKS Page 34

Page 35: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4.1 ELEMENTS FOR DEMOLITION AND DISPOSAL

Element/component Location Part of the existing residential building, all of the existing reception building, all of the garage beside the existing reception building

Refer to 1535 GA.10

Salvage the following elements and deliver to the owner. 4.2 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE AND DELIVERY TO OWNER

Element/component Location Delivery requirements Any stainless steel Both buildings Pass to NCC

Salvage the following elements. 4.3 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE AND DISPOSAL BY CONTRACTOR

Element/component Location Disposal requirements

Any asbestos to be disposed of in accordance with the New Zealand guidelines for the management of the removal of asbestos

To be determined by the demolition contractor

 

4.4 ELEMENTS FOR RE-USE

Element/component Location Location for re-use No elements for re-use    

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 2110 DEMOLITION WORKS Page 35

Page 36: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

3820 CARPENTRY

  This section relates to the supply and erection of timber framing, as a framed structure, or as partitioning.  It includes prefabricated timber and engineered wood. The new building has 140 x 45 external timber framing throughout with 90 x 45 internal timber framing.  It has a Rib-Raft concrete slab, 2 steel portals, some steel framed structure and standard timber trusses in the lower roof part of the building.  Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 19, 30, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and GD.20, 21, 22.  This section includes the substrate and cavity battens required for the Craftstone real stone veneer panels.   Fundermax exterior panels to provide sun shading on the north elevation above the veranda roof are also included in this section.  Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 and details on drawing 1535 GD.21.

1 GENERAL

Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft Underlays, Foils and DPC Refer to 4231HW  James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding Refer to 4272C  Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Refer to 4281RL  RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System Refer to 4311D  Dimond Profiled Metal Roofing Refer to 4521AC  APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors Refer to 4710P  Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation Refer to 5113G  Gib plasterboard linings Refer to 5151 Internal Trim Refer to 5230  Interior doors Refer to 5311F  Forman Suspended Tile Ceiling Systems Refer to 5313F  Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling System Refer to 5511LC  Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry Refer to 5517LB  Laminex New Zealand Benchtops

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

*A copy of NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings, must be held on site.

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC B2/AS1 Durability AS/NZS 1328.1 Glued laminated structural timber - Performance requirements and

minimum production requirements AS/NZS 1604.5 Specification for preservative treatment - Glue laminated timber products NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3603 Timber structures standard NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 3622 Verification of timber properties NZS 3640 Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber AS/NZS 4357.0 Structural laminated veneer lumber - Specification FTMA CoP Frame and Truss Manufacturers Association Code of Practice

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Carters   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Carter Holt Harvey Woodproducts Ltd Web: www.chhproducts.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 326 759

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Fundermax GmbH   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Maxclad Web: www.maxclad.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 03 358 8179, 021 614 373

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 36

Page 37: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Workers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

All timber sizes except for battens are actual minimum dried sizes. 1.6 DIMENSIONS

2 PRODUCTS

Species, grade and in service moisture content to NZS 3602, NZBC B2/AS1 and treatment to NZS 3640, NZBC B2/AS1.  Structural grade (SG) to NZS 3604, NZS 3622 with properties to NZS 3603.

2.1 TIMBER FRAMING, TREATED

To FTMA CoP.  Moisture content 16% at supply. 2.2 TIMBER TRUSSES

H3.1 Radiata pine battens, minimum 20mm thickness, width and height to match timber framing studs.  Temporary fix battens before being fixed into the framing with the cladding fixings.  To  NZS 3602, table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance. The cavity battens for the Craftstone real stone veneer panels are 45mm wide x 40mm deep H3.1 Radiata pine.  Temporary fix battens before being fixed into the framing with the cladding fixings.To  NZS 3602, table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.

2.3 EXTERIOR CAVITY WALL BATTENS - TIMBER - NON-STRUCTURAL

BGC Medium Density fibre cement autoclaved sheet - 9mm minimum 2.4 SUBSTRATE FOR CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM

Max Exterior F-Quality - 8.0 to 11.9mm

Components

2.5 FUNDERMAX PANELS

Type to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the size and number for each particular types of joint as laid down in the nailing schedules of NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.6 NAILS

Bolts and screws of engineering and/or coach type complete with washers, to the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.7 BOLTS AND SCREWS

Comply with the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.  Plates to the plate manufacturer's design for the particular locations as shown on the drawings.

2.8 NAIL PLATES

Comply with the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.  Connectors and structural brackets to the connector manufacturer's design for particular locations shown on drawings.

2.9 CONNECTORS

For interior timber, treated with copper-based timber preservatives (H3.2 or higher), use a minimum of hot-dipped galvanized steel fixings and fasteners.   For exterior timber, timber in damp areas and timber subject to occasional wetting, use only stainless steel (or equivalent) fixings and connectors, when the timber is treated with; Copper Azole (CuAz, Preservative code 58), Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ, Preservative code 90), Micronise Copper Azole (code 88) or Micronised Copper Quaternary (code 89).

2.10 CORROSION RISKS

Refer to 4161T Thermakraft Underlays, foils and DPC 2.11 DPC

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 37

Page 38: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

To NZS 3604 except as varied in this specification.  Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

Separate all timber framing timbers from concrete, masonry and brick by: - � a full length bituminous damp-proof membrane overlapping timber by at least 6mm; or � a 12mm minimum free draining air space

3.2 SEPARATION

Provide and fix blocks, nogs, openings and other items as required by other trades. 3.3 ATTENDANCE

Maximum allowable equilibrium moisture content (EMC) for non air-conditioned or centrally heated buildings for framing to which linings are attached.

3.4 MOISTURE CONTENT

Framing at erection: 24% maximum   Framing at enclosure: 20% maximum   Framing at lining: 16% maximum  

Set out framing in accordance with the requirements of NZS 3604 and as required to support sheet linings and claddings.

3.5 SET-OUT

Frame to required loading and bracing complete with lintels, sills and nogs, all fabricated and fastened to NZS 3604, section 8, Walls.

3.6 FRAMING WALLS

Frame to required loading and bracing complete with valley boards, ridge boards and purlins.  Design and fit roof trusses complete with anchorage.  All fabricated and fastened to NZS 3604, section 9, Posts and 10, Roof framing.

3.7 FRAMING ROOFS

Frame to required loading and bracing complete with runners and battens set out to support ceiling lining.  All fabricated and fastened to NZS 3604, section 13, Ceilings.  Trim for openings in ceilings and hatches to NZS 3604 section 13.3, Openings in ceilings.  Provide blocking for water tanks located in the ceiling space to NZS 3604, section 13.4, Water tanks in roof space.

3.8 FRAMING CEILINGS

Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 3.9 INSTALLING WALL UNDERLAYS

Fit and fix 20mm and 45 x 45 cavity battens over wall underlay, fully nail to timber studs to the requirements of the manufacturer or to NZS 3604.  Fit and fix related flashings.  Fit and fix cavity closers to base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions and over openings (windows, meters etc.).

3.10 FIT CAVITY BATTENS

 Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 3.11 DPC TO LOSP TREATED TIMBER

Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 3.12 DPC TO TIMBER

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING - RADIATA PINE

Member Species Grade Treatment Exterior walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Jamb battens Radiata pine Merch H3.1          

4.2 CAVITY BATTENS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 38

Page 39: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Cavity battens Species Grade Treatment Timber - Non Structural: Radiata pine Merchantable H3.1         Cavity closer: Type: uPVC perforated strip n/a

4.3 ROOF FRAMING - RADIATA PINE

Member Species Grade Treatment Rafters: Radiata pine SG8, SG10 in veranda roof H1.2 Trusses: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Purlins: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Skillion roof framing   Radiata pine SG8 H1.2                        

4.4 INTERIOR FRAMING - RADIATA PINE

Member Species Grade Treatment Non structural walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Structural and braced walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

4.5 FUNDERMAX SUN SHADING PANELS

Product Thickness Colour Colour Max Exterior F-Quality 8.0 to 11.9mm Steel blue (0712 NG) To be confirmed  

4.6 NAILS

Location Type Material Finish Linea cladding fixings Jolt head, flat head Galvanised steel  

4.7 BOLTS AND SCREWS

Location Type Material Finish Timber to timber connections Coach screws Galvanised steel  

4.8 NAIL PLATES

Location Type Material Finish Timber to timber connection Pryda Multigrips Galvanised steel  

4.9 CONNECTORS

Location Type Material Finish Fascia supports Steel angle cleats Galvanised  

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 39

Page 40: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC

  This section relates to the application of Thermakraft Industries (NZ) Ltd, DPC, DPM, underfloor foil insulation, wall underlays and roofing underlays.   Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13,

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 4710P  Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.   The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

  The following definitions apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc.

Wall underlay the same meaning as defined in NZBC E2/AS1, covering kraft based and synthetic wall underlays, sometimes called, wall wraps, building wraps or building papers.

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS 1530.2 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures -

Test for flammability of materials NZS 2295 Pliable, permeable building underlays AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4200.1 Pliable building membranes and underlays - Materials NZS 4214 Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of buildings AS/NZS 4389 Roof safety mesh AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice

Thermakraft documents relating to work in this section are: Thermakraft product manual and technical data sheets. BRANZ Appraisal 329 - Supercourse 500 Damp-Proof Course and Concealed Flashing BRANZ Appraisal 651 - Thermakraft  Covertek™ 407 Fire Retardant Self Supporting Synthetic Roofing Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 695 - Watergate-Plus Fire Retardant Wall Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 803 - Bulldog™/Aluminium Window Sealing System BRANZ Appraisal 878 - Thermakraft Aluband Window Flashing Tape Code Mark Certificate 30028 - Thermakraft Covertek 407 Absorbent Breathable Roof Underlay   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Thermakraft Industries (NZ) Ltd Web: www.thermakraft.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 806 595

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 40

Page 41: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials and execution.  Thermakraft Industries Ltd warrant performance of products if design and installation complies with relevant technical literature, NZBC, and recognised industry Codes of Practice.  Copy of Thermakraft Product Warranty available on request.

Requirements

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified materials, or associated products, components or accessories.1.6 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Installers to be experienced in the installation of Thermakraft products and familiar with Thermakraft Industries technical literature and the related documents listed in this design i.e. NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice.

1.7 INSTALLATION SKILL LEVELS

Materials

DPC

2 PRODUCTS

Supercourse 500™ hi-impact polyethylene film to AS/NZS 2904 and embossed on both sides.  Thickness 500 microns minimum, manufactured for use as a damp-proof course and concealed flashings around doors and windows and to BRANZ Appraisal 329.  Refer to SELECTIONS for type of jointing tape.

DPM

2.1 EMBOSSED POLYETHYLENE

Thermathene Orange™ 300, a super heavy duty high impact film, 300 microns thick and manufactured for the building industry, to NZBC E2/AS1.  Refer to SELECTIONS for type of jointing tape.

UNDERFLOOR INSULATION - REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION OF INSULATION PODS TO FORM THE RIB-RAFT FLOOR SLAB

Wall underlays

2.2 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE - HEAVY DUTY

Watergate-Plus™, absorbent breathable spun bonded non-woven polyolefin type building membrane, coated with a water resistant vapour permeable film.  A fire retardant membrane, with Flammability Index of ≤ 5, when tested to AS 1530.2.  The product has a BRANZ Appraisal 695.

Roofing underlays

2.3 SYNTHETIC BREATHER TYPE FILM COATED WALL UNDERLAY

CoverTek™ 407, a fire retardant non-woven self supporting roofing underlay, consisting of two spun-bonded polyolefin fabric layers bonded to a micro porous inner layer, designed for use as a water absorbent, breathable, water resistant roofing underlay for sloped roofs.  CoverTek™ 407 has a flammability index of ≤ 5, tested to AS 1530.2, to NZBC C/AS1-AS7, meets the requirements for suspended fabrics, BRANZ Appraisal 651 and Code Mark Certificate 30028.  Can be used in areas exposed to view in occupied spaces.

Accessories

2.4 SYNTHETIC FIRE RETARDANT SELF SUPPORTING NON-WOVEN ROOFING UNDERLAY

Thermakraft Aluband™ Window Sealing Tape system consists of synthetic faced reinforced bituminous window sealing tape, Thermakraft Aluband™ Corner Moulding™  piece, used in conjunction with the Thermakraft Aluband™ Hand Tool to ensure good adhesion and a tight fit into corners.  See Thermakraft Data Sheet 312 for installation details and BRANZ Appraisal 878.

2.5 WINDOW AND DOOR SEALING TAPE

Thermastrap 201, 19mm wide polyethylene straps. 2.6 STUD STRAPS - POLYETHYLENE

Ausmesh 300, 2mm x 150 x 300mm galvanized or PVC coated safety mesh to AS/NZS 4389. 2.7 AUSMESH SAFETY MESH

Thermakraft 215™, bituminous breather type underlay to NZS 2295 cut to width for use under valley, apron flashing and internal gutters. Soffit liner cut to width from Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay.  Refer to SELECTIONS.

2.8 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 41

Page 42: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Thermakraft tapes to compliment the underlay.  Pressure sensitive aluminium foil tapes for joining foil insulation and vapour barriers.  These include:

� Thermakraft White General Purpose Underlay Tape � Thermakraft Window Sealing Tapes, used to repair damaged bituminous underlays

2.9 TAPE

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Design application and installation of Thermakraft Building products to NZBC E2/AS1, BRANZ Appraisals, Thermakraft Technical Literature and Industry Codes of Practice.

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Store building underlays and accessory materials, under conditions that ensure no deterioration or damage.  Store rolls in an upright position on a smooth floor and protected from sunlight, UV radiation and moisture.

3.2 STORAGE

Before starting work, check that the building construction phase will allow work of the required standard.  Carry out remedial work identified before laying underlay.

Application DPC

3.3 INSPECTION

Lay Supercourse 500™ DPC under LOSP or CCA treated bottom plate of all timber framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.

3.4 DPC TO LOSP/CCA TREATED TIMBER

Lay DPC under the bottom plate of all timber / steel framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.  Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

Application - DPM

3.5 DPC TO TIMBER / STEEL

Lay DPM under concrete floor substrate over sand blinding, in a single layer with 150mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.  Refer to SELECTIONS for type.  Tape all joints and penetrations with Thermakraft White GP underlay tape.

Application - wall underlay

3.6 DPM TO CONCRETE FLOOR

Fix horizontally to outside face of framing in true alignment, with succeeding sheets overlapping 150mm to NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.7, Wall underlay, and refer to Thermakraft  Industries for requirement for fastenings.  Fix to Thermakraft Industries Technical Data specifications.  Scribe neatly around penetrations and openings to leave no gaps.  Tape all penetrations.  Keep clean, undamaged and without visible weather deterioration until closed in.

3.7 WALL UNDERLAY

Over underlay, install 19mm wide polyethylene straps horizontally at 300mm centres, draw taut and fix to studs with stainless steel staples.

Application - roofing underlay

3.8 INSTALL STUD STRAPS

Lay 75mm galvanized wire netting at right angles across the purlins and drawn taut before fixing.  Tie edges of netting together with galvanized wire clips.

3.9 WIRE NETTING - IN VERANDA ROOF ONLY

Lay Ausmesh 300 safety mesh over exposed roof areas fixed in accordance with AS/NZS 4389 and NZMRM CoP.

3.10 SAFETY MESH

Lay horizontally across the rafter/trusses starting at the gutter line with succeeding sheets in true alignment and lapping 150mm.  Scribe around and fit neatly to all penetrations.  Avoid prolong exposure by installing the roof immediately.

3.11 ROOF UNDERLAY

3.12 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 42

Page 43: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Lay Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay cut to width by manufacturer for use as an underlay to valley, apron flashings, and internal gutters.  Lap under flashings with adjoining underlays.  Fix Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay soffit liner from top plate down 150mm past ribbon plate.

Apply from the lowest point to allow laps to shed water.  All edge and end laps must be overlapped by a minimum of 150mm.  Ensure that the underlay is properly fixed to the surface at perimeters or around penetrations.

Completion

3.13 ROOF UNDERLAY INSTALLATION

Clean up as the work proceeds. 3.14 CLEAN UP

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.15 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.16 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.thermakraft.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Damp Proof Course

4 SELECTIONS

Damp Proof Membrane

4.1 THERMAKRAFT - SUPERCOURSE 500™ DPC

Location: Between all timber base plates and concrete slabs Type: Supercourse 500™ DPC Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband

Wall Underlays

4.2 THERMATHENE ORANGE™ 300 SUPER HEAVY DUTY HIGH IMPACT FILM

Location: Below Insulation pods in the Rib-Raft floor construction Type: Thermathene Orange™ 300 super heavy duty high impact film Jointing tape: Thermakraft "White General Purpose Underlay Tape"

Roofing Underlays

4.3 THERMAKRAFT WATERGATE-PLUS™

Location: All external walls Type: Thermakraft Watergate-Plus™ Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband

Window / Door Sealing System

4.4 COVERTEK ROOFING UNDERLAYS

Location: Below all Colorsteel Endura profiled roof sheetings Type: CoverTek 407 Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband

Stud Straps

4.5 THERMAKRAFT - ALUBAND™

Location: All window and door building wrap junctions Type: Thermakraft window sill tape 75mm Aluband™

Wire Netting

4.6 THERMASTRAP

Location: Where studs are greater than 450mm apart Type: Thermastrap 201, 19mm blue polypropylene tape

4.7 WIRE NETTING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 43

Page 44: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Safety Mesh

Location: Below the roofing underlay in the veranda roofing Type: 75mm galvanised wire netting

Gutter and Under Flashing

4.8 THERMAKRAFT - AUSMESH 300

Location: Below the roofing underlay in the skillion roof over the reception area

Type: Ausmesh 300 Finish: Galvanised

4.9 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS

Location: At all apron flashings Type: Apron flashing underlay 414mm wide Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 44

Page 45: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING

  This section relates to the supply and fixing of the following fibre cement products:

� James Hardie Linea® Weatherboard cladding � James Hardie selected soffit lining

  The building is clad in Linea, Craftstone and RSC LiteRock render system - refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 19, 30, 40, 41, 42, 43 and 44 and  GD.20, 21 and 22. The scope also includes 600mm wide external soffits and larger soffit areas below the veranda roofs.

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Capentry Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4521AC  APL Commercial alumiuium windows and doors   Refer to painting section/s for the protective coating required to meet the NZBC durability requirements.

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC E2/VM1 Weathertightness AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings

James Hardie documents relating to this part of the work: Linea® Weatherboard technical specification Linea® Oblique Weatherboard horizontal installation technical specification Linea® Oblique Weatherboard vertical installation technical specification James Hardie Weatherboards technical specification Eaves and Soffit Linings installation manual BRANZ Appraisal 447 - Linea® Weatherboard Cavity Cladding CodeMark™ Certificate Number GM-10-30018 James Hardie Linea™ Weatherboard Direct fixed and Cavity Cladding   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

  BRANZ appraisal is available at www.branz.co.nz.

Warranties

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: James Hardie New Zealand Web: www.jameshardie.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: Contact James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the manufacturer's standard form.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

25 years: For Linea® Weatherboard product (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty)

15 years: For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty)

15 years: For James Hardie HardieGroove Lining From: Date of purchase

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 45

Page 46: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Requirements

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Provide relevant James Hardie maintenance requirements at completion of the work.

Requirements - Linea Weatherboard with CodeMark™ Certificate

1.6 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Installer to be experienced in the application and a; � A Licenced Building Practitioner; or, � A person with a trade certificate being a current member of a Building Trade Association.

If requested provide evidence of qualification prior to commencing work.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS - LINEA® INSTALLER

Installer to comply with all the relevant information in; � Linea® Weatherboard Technical Specification (Mar 2015); and, � BRANZ Appraisal 446 or BRANZ Appraisal 447

1.8 LINEA® WEATHERBOARD INSTALLATION INFORMATION

Installer to complete, sign and provide a James Hardie Installation Checklist incorporating the Certificate of Installation requirements of Global-Mark CodeMark Certification program.  Contact James Hardie for a copy of the Installation Checklist.

Performance

1.9 LINEA® WEATHERBOARD INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, up to and including Extra High Wind Zone.  James Hardie Technical Specifications are suitable for these conditions.

1.10 PERFORMANCE, WIND

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Radiata pine battens, minimum 45mm wide x 18mm thick, H3.1 treated, height to match timber framing studs.  To NZS 3602, Table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.

2.1 EXTERIOR CAVITY BATTENS

Perforated uPVC, with upstands. 2.2 EXTERIOR CAVITY CLOSER/VERMIN-PROOFING

James Hardie Linea® Weatherboards, 16mm thick, pre-primed, manufactured from a reduced density cellulose fibre cement formulation and cured by high pressure autoclaving, manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2, tested to NZBC E2/VM1 for weathertightness and complying with the NZBC.

2.3 LINEA® WEATHERBOARDS

James Hardie 7.5mm HardieGroove Lining.  Lining manufactured from treated cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water and cured by high pressure autoclaving manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2

Components

2.4 SOFFIT LINING

Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC.  Refer to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions.   Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection, and NZBC E2/AS1, Table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.

Check against SED (specific engineering design) requirements for microclimate conditions.

2.5 FASTENER TYPE

Zone Fixings Material Zone D, Zone E / Microclimates (incl. Geothermal) Grade 316 Stainless Zone B, Zone C Hot-dipped galvanized Bracing - All zones Grade 316 Stainless

30mm x 7 gauge stainless steel HardieDrive screws 2.6 SCREWS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 46

Page 47: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

60mm x 3.15mm diameter jolt head 65mm x 2.87mm diameter D head ring shank nail 65mm x 2.87mm diameter RoundDrive ring shank nail 75mm x 3.15mm diameter jolt head 90mm x 4.0mm diameter jolt head HardieFlex™ Nail 40mm x 2.8mm diameter HardieFlex™ Nail 50mm x 2.8mm diameter HardieFlex™ Nail 60mm x 3.15mm diameter HardieFlex™ Nail 75mm x 3.15mm diameter

2.7 GALVANIZED NAILS

Extruded uPVC jointer, 2 way jointer, capping and scotia mould.

Accessories

2.8 SOFFIT JOINTERS AND CAPPING MOULDS

Silaflex MS sealant or similar.  Refer to James Hardie technical specifications for application requirements. 2.9 SEALANT

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet.  Protect edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed.

3.1 STORAGE

Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces.  Carry weatherboards in vertical position.  Do not drag weatherboards across each other, or across other materials.  Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.

3.2 HANDLING

Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required by James Hardie for the specified finish; plumb, level and in true alignment.  Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after sheets are fixed.

Application - generally

3.3 SUBSTRATE

Install 18mm minimum thick cavity battens to NZBC E2/AS1: 9.0 Wall claddings, where required.  Fix vertical cavity battens to wall framing studs.  The battens are fixed by the cladding fixings which will penetrate the wall framing studs under the wall underlay.  Seal the top of the cavity and install cavity closer/vermin-proofing at base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions, over openings (windows, meters etc).  Do not use horizontal cavity battens.  Use cavity spacers where fixing is required between cavity battens.

3.4 INSTALL CAVITY BATTENS

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding.  Required preparatory work includes the following:

� Wall underlay appropriately incorporated with penetration and junction flashings. � Materials lapped in a way that water tracks down to the exterior face of the wall underlay. � Wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames

and other penetrations � Claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings � Installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating elements).

3.5 PENETRATIONS AND FLASHINGS

Cut weatherboards to required lengths and fit joints off-stud using tongue and groove ends.  Fit internal corners and fix weatherboards as per Linea® Weatherboard technical specifications.  Fit and fix external corners and joint soakers as required.

3.6 INSTALL LINEA® WEATHERBOARDS

Install flashings at all wall openings, penetrations, junctions, connections, window sills, heads and jambs to NZBC E2/AS1.

3.7 INSTALL FLASHINGS

Cut sheets dry and ensure all edges and joints are fully supported.  Nail and insert uPVC fasteners to James Hardie requirements.  Fit complete with jointers and capping moulds.  Refer to Eaves and Soffit Linings installation manual.

3.8 INSTALL SOFFIT SHEETS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 47

Page 48: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Completion

Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.9 REPLACE

Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.10 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.11 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4 SELECTIONS

Linea® Weatherboards

4.1 CAVITY BATTENS

Timber species: Radiata pine Treatment: H3.1

4.2 JAMES HARDIE LINEA® WEATHERBOARDS

Location: As shown on drawing 1535 GA.30 Elevations and 1535 GD.20, 21, 22 Brand/type: James Hardie Linea® Weatherboard Thickness: 16mm Width: 150mm Construction: Cavity Nail pattern: Concealed nailing Nail finish: Galvanised steel Nails: 60 x 3.15 HardieFlex nails

4.3 JAMES HARDIE LINEA® WEATHERBOARD CORNERS

Type: Mitred Soaker type: Aluminium

Finishing

4.4 JAMES HARDIE SOFFIT SHEETS

Brand/type: James Hardie HardieGroove Thickness: 7.5mm Jointer type: Chamfer formed on site for butt jointing along short edges, half 

grooves along long edges under the veranda for butt jointing Nails: 40 x 2.8 HardieFlex Nails

Refer to painting section(s) for details. 4.5 PAINTING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 48

Page 49: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM

  This section relates to the supply and installation of Craftstone NZ Ltd Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System as a non-structural, decorative, natural stone veneer adhered to various substrates. These include:

� fibre cement board on a drained cavity over timber framing   Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 for positions of the 4 areas of stone veneer - these run from base overhangs up to underside of the veranda roofs and from base overhangs up to underside of the main roofs.  The design is such that the panels stop above, to the side and below the area where the veranda roof comes up to the Craftstone wall on the west elevation

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820 Carpentry for substrate and cavity batten system Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4281RL  RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System Refer to 4710P  Pink Batts and Pink Batts Silencer Insulation

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheets NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NASH Standard Residential and low-rise steel framing Part 1: Design Criteria NASH Handbook Best practice for Design and construction of Residential and low-rise Steel

Framing NASH N-10 Thermal Break and Cavity Construction

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual BRANZ Appraisal 793 - Craftstone Real Stone Veneer Systems   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Warranties

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Craftstone NZ Ltd Web: www.craftstone.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 447 3918

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For material components of Craftstone system.

� Provide this warranty on Craftstone NZ Ltd standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Provide an installer warranty: 5 years: For installation of the Craftstone system.

� Provide this warranty on the Craftstone Approved Installer's standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 49

Page 50: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Installers to be approved installers and registered members of Craftstone NZ Ltd installer's network. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified systems, components and associated products listed in this section.

Compliance information

1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Provide the following compliance documentation: - � Licensed applicators approval certificate from the manufacturer / importer / distributor � Manufacturer's, importers or distributors warranty � Licensed applicator's warranty � Producer Statement - Construction from the installer

Performance - Wind (design by contractor)

1.8 INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE

Design the installation to the wind zone parameters of NZS 3604, table 5.4. Refer to general section 1220 PROJECT for details.

1.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Feature SchistClad Panels - Real Stone Veneer, natural stone pieces pre-cut into rectangles and epoxy glued together to form modular panels, measuring approximately 600mm long x 150mm high x 20mm to 30mm nominal thickness, 60 kg/m² approximate weight.  Options available include 400mm x 150mm natural ends. Refer to SELECTIONS for size and colour options.

2.1 FEATURE SCHIST - REAL STONE PANELS

To AS/NZS 2908.2.  BGC Stonesheet medium density, fibre cement autoclaved sheet produced on a "flow on" process, with specified edge details and surface finishes. Sheets available 9mm x 1200mm wide x 2400mm/ 2700mm/ 3000mm long. Refer to the carpentry section for specific requirements.

2.2 FIBRE CEMENT SUBSTRATE - ON TIMBER OR STEEL FRAMING

Cavity batten system comprised of: � Radiata pine battens, 40mm thickness x 40mm depth, width and height to match framing studs.

 Treatment to NZBC B2/AS1 and NZS 3602, table 1. Refer to appropriate cavity batten system section for specific requirements.

Components

2.3 CAVITY BATTEN

Craftseal Water-Proofer, a penetrating silane/siloxane sealer and waterproofer, formulated specifically to prevent moisture absorption into masonry and fibre cement substrates.  Applied by brush or spray-pack, supplied as a liquid concentrate diluted with water ready to use.

2.4 SEALER/WATERPROOFER

Adhesive Spray Primer, a specialised primer applied to fibre cement sheet joints and external corners, prior to application of Craftape, a flexible adhesive-compatible waterproofing tape.  Tape supplied in two sizes:

� 70mm wide x 30m long for sheet joints � 150mm wide x 30m long for external corners.

2.5 PRIMER AND JOINT WATERPROOFING TAPE

Craftbond Adhesive Mortar, a factory mixed, crack resistant, adhesive mortar with a high flexural-strength ratio for use as an adhesive coating for all concrete, masonry, fibre cement and AAC concrete substrates.  Supplied in bags and mixed with water for use.  Cures to a light grey colour and may require tinting with dispersed oxide for some applications.

2.6 ADHESIVE MORTAR

Craftanchor, a proprietary 304 stainless steel anchor, 70mm long x 20mm wide, fixed with 65mm x 12 gauge hex head self-drilling screws at 300mm centres vertically to studs spaced at 400mm centres maximum.

2.7 STONE VENEER ANCHOR

Craftsill and Craftjamb flashings for flush mounted door and window joinery. 2.8 SILL AND JAMB FLASHINGS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 50

Page 51: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Craftint mortar colours, a dispersed liquid oxide, formulated to be diluted with clean water to achieve the selected colour, available in a range of colours, from black to deep grey.  Refer to SELECTIONS for colour options.

2.9 TINTING MORTAR

Craftstone NZ Ltd range of uv resistant PVC flashings, trims and sealant support accessories.  Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

Accessories

2.10 PVC FLASHING AND FINISHING TRIMS

Overlap each second course 2.11 ANGLE CHANGES

Craftstone preformed sills.  Refer to SELECTIONS. 2.12 SILLS

Craftstone preformed wall caps.  Refer to SELECTIONS. 2.13 WALL CAPS

Craftstone preformed column caps.  Refer to SELECTIONS. 2.14 COLUMN CAPS

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Take delivery of materials and goods, store on site and protect from damage. Provide dry under cover storage for Craftstone Real Stone Veneer materials, components and accessories.  Store liquids in frost free conditions. Handle all materials in accordance with Craftstone NZ Ltd instructions.

3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for this part of the work. 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Timber framing to comply with NZS 3604.  Check studs are at a maximum 400mm centres and nogs are fitted flush between studs at a maximum 800mm centres.

3.3 TIMBER FRAMING

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the Craftstone Real Stone Veneer.  Required preparatory work includes the following:

� stone veneer wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames and other penetrations by main contractor

� stone veneer neatly finished off to all sides of openings � installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating elements).

3.4 PENETRATIONS

Ensure that cavity batten system is installed to the cavity batten manufacturer's installation requirements, and in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual.

3.5 CAVITY BATTENS

Ensure that the substrate is suitable for the veneer application, installed to the fibre cement manufacturer's installation requirements, as required by NZBC B1/AS1, and in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual.

3.6 SUBSTRATE - FIBRE CEMENT, ON TIMBER OR STEEL FRAMING

Craftanchor and fixings for fibre cement applications to be supplied by Craftstone NZ Ltd and installed by main contractor in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual.

Installation/application

3.7 ANCHORS - INSTALLED BY MAIN CONTRACTOR

Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements.

Installation - general

3.8 STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 51

Page 52: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Install Craftstone Real Stone Veneer in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual, and to NZBC E2/AS1.

Installation/application - with fibre cement substrate

3.9 INSTALLATION GENERAL

Clean board surface with a stiff brush or broom to remove dust or any other contaminants which may impede adhesion of mortar.

3.10 PREPARE SUBSTRATE

Apply liberal coating on Craftseal with brush or spray-pack.  Coat all exposed board including joint recesses and the bottom sheet edge.

3.11 APPLY SEALER

Apply Spray Adhesive to all areas where taped joints are to be installed, then apply 70mm band to sheet joints, and 150mm band to external corners.  Press edges firmly into place as the adhesive sets.

3.12 APPLY SPRAY ADHESIVE AND CRAFTAPE

Set construction joints, extrusions and mechanical sill and jamb flashings into place with fibreglass reinforced mesh embedded in a layer of Craftbond. Note construction joints and extrusions supplied and installed by main contractor.  Mechanical sill and jamb flashings supplied and installed by Craftstone approved installers.

3.13 SET CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND WINDOW FLASHINGS

Set up temporary timber supports for the bottom course. 3.14 SET UP TEMPORARY TIMBER SUPPORTS

Mark out framing lines (studs) and fix stainless steel Craftanchors to studs with 65mm x 12 gauge hex head self-drilling screws at 300mm centres.  Position anchors horizontally wherever possible.

3.15 INSTALL ANCHORS - BY MAIN CONTRACTOR

Mix Craftbond adhesive mortar at a ratio of 4 litres of clean water to each 20kg, using a mixing drill and whisk, and allow to set for 4-5minutes before lightly remixing.  Do not make up more than can be used in 2 hours.   Press mortar under the anchor wings, then apply an 8-10mm continuous layer of mortar to board surface to sufficiently cover anchor, while embedding stone modules.  Limit the area to that which can be covered with stone within a 15-20 minute period.   Ensure a mortar tail of sufficient thickness is remaining after stone installation so the next bedding application can be blended for continuity.  " Buttering" can be used to assist with embedment.

3.16 APPLY ADHESIVE MORTAR

Press stone firmly into mortar with a wriggling motion for initial suction bonding.  Take extra care to ensure mortar does not contaminate surface of the stone.   Install bottom course and corner stones first and then fill the spaces in between with appropriate random or cut pieces.  Mark the wall with chalk line at suitable intervals to assist with straight and level placement of the stones.   Where stone crosses control or construction joints, stonework must be finger jointed at the intersection of the joint by applying mortar to the longest side of the stone only, allowing the remainder to float across the joint.  Schistclad individual stone installations would require specific selection of stones of suitable length to achieve this.  As a general rule Craftstone recommends a ratio of 75% mortared, to 25% floating.

3.17 INSTALL STONE

Sort corner pieces and use four similar sized corners and flats on each course.  Cut back each second course of corner stones to achieve a natural look and to achieve the fit to size.

Installation - accessories

3.18 COLUMNS

Ensure electrical cables do not come into contact with cladding substrate.  Support cable immediately behind the board by passing through a hole drilled in framing member. Where required fit a meter box flashing option in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual.  Allow a minimum 5mm drainage and ventilation gap between the top of the head flashing and bottom edge of the stone.

3.19 JOINERY AND METER BOXES

Ensure allowance is made for sills.  Fit wedge shaped sills with a minimum 15 degree angle to NZBC E2/AS1.Figure 73c.  Adhere smaller 90mm sills directly to the wall.

3.20 SILLS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 52

Page 53: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Control joints

Refer to Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual for formation of control joints. Where individual stones cross a control joint, apply mortar to the longest side only and avoid mortar crossing the joint.  Finger joint the stone over the control joint.  Apply this technique in layers over the height of the wall to conceal the joint.   Note: Control and expansion joints to be in accordance with substrate manufacturer's requirements and be installed by the substrate installer.

Inter-storey junctions

3.21 CONTROL JOINTS

Construct in accordance with substrate manufacturer's requirements, and to NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.9.4.

Cleaning and protection

3.22 INTER-STOREY JUNCTIONS

Keep stone dry at all times prior to laying.  Protect the top row of uncompleted walls.  Protect freshly laid veneer during interruption through rain and at completion of each day's work.

3.23 WET WEATHER

Keep work face clean during erection and until completion of the contract works.  Ensure all excess mortar adhesive is cleared off the face of the veneer regularly using a sponge or brush.  Turn back scaffold boards at night and during heavy rain.  Do not rub face work to remove stains.

Completion

3.24 KEEP WORK FACE CLEAN

Following a minimum of overnight curing wash the completed stonework thoroughly, allow it to dry and then coat with Craftseal.

3.25 SEAL SCHIST STONES AND PANELS

Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal of all debris, unused and temporary materials and elements from the site.  Use fresh water and a light brush to clean the stone.  Mortar splashes or overflows must be cleaned off the stone face on the same day.  Do not water blast or use acids or bleaches.

3.26 ROUTINE CLEANING

Repair damaged or marked elements.  Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable.  Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.27 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK

For further details on selections go to www.craftstone.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following.

Materials

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 FEATURE SCHIST STONE PANELS

Location: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 and GD.22 Manufacturer Craftstone NZ Ltd Brand/type: Feature SchistClad Panels - Real Stone Veneer Size: 600mm x 150mm high approximately Thickness: 20mm - 30mm nominal Weight: 60kg/m² approximately Angle change: Overlap each second course Installation: Dry stacked Colour: Basalt grey possibly - contractor to supply samples

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 53

Page 54: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM

  This section relates to Resene Construction Systems LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System applied over approved fibre cement backing sheet substrate fixed over a drained cavity to timber or steel framing. The scope includes areas below aluminium joinery cills, beside aluminium joinery jambs, at junctions to Craftstone panel cladding and above the low level window heads. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 and GD.21 and 22

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4272C  Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Refer to 4521AC  APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors  

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.   The following abbreviations are used throughout this work section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

MPNZA Master Painters NZ Association. PPCS Proprietary Plaster Cladding Standard LRV Light Reflectance Value

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

  Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.  However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZS 3603 Timber structures standard NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed steel structures

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: � Resene Construction Systems Technical Manual � Resene Construction Systems Trade Spec™ � Resene Construction Systems Project Guide � Resene Total Colour System � BRANZ Appraisal 477 - LiteRock Cavity Plus Solid Render System

  Materials and execution to Resene Construction Systems specification except where varied by this specification and supported by architectural detailing.   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Contact details for Resene literature is 0800 RESENE (0800 737 363) or web site www.resene.co.nz.

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Resene Construction Systems Web: www.reseneconstruction.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 50 70 40

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years:  For materials by Resene Construction Systems  

� Provide this warranty on the Resene Construction Systems standard form.

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 54

Page 55: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

� Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.   Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 5 years:  For execution/workmanship - by Registered Plasterer  

� Provide this warranty on the Resene Construction Systems standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

Use only PPCS (Proprietary Plaster Cladding Standard) registered applicators licensed to apply the Resene Construction Systems exterior render systems.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Resene Construction Systems wall cladding system. 1.8 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Submit one 300mm x 300mm sample of the selected texture finish and colour for approval.  Obtain signature of acceptance on sample and return to the Registered Plasterer.

1.9 FINISH SAMPLE

Provide Resene Construction Systems Maintenance Guide on or before practical completion of the contract for issuing to the building owner.  Resene Construction Systems Maintenance Guide to be provided on request.

1.10 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Refer to the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act and WorkSafe NZ: Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the construction industry.  If the elimination or isolation of potential hazards is not possible then minimise hazards in this work on site by using the proper equipment and techniques as required in the MPNZA Painters hazard handbook.  Supply protective clothing and equipment.  Inform employees and others on site of the hazards and put into place procedures for dealing with emergencies.  Obtain from Resene Construction Systems the material safety data sheets for each product.  Keep sheets on site and comply with the required safety procedures.

1.11 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Provide the producer statement compiled by the licensed applicator in the form as required by the Building Consent Authority.

Compliance information

1.12 PRODUCER STATEMENT

The work covered by this part of the specification has been designed and constructed to achieve a durability of 15 years.  Refer to the following; BRANZ Appraisal 477 - LiteRock Cavity Plus Solid Render System

Performance

1.13 DURABILITY

Accept responsibility for the structural and weather-tight performance of the cladding installation. 1.14 PERFORMANCE

Allow to inspect the whole of the work at each stage.  Determine a programme for inspections including notification when each part and stage of the work is ready for inspection prior to the work commencing.  Permit representatives of Resene Construction Systems to inspect the work in progress and to take samples of their products from site if requested refer Resene Construction Systems Project Guide.

1.15 INSPECTIONS

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Waterborne co-polymer resin. 2.1 RESENE CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS ACRYLBOND (PLASTER MODIFIER)

2.2 ROCKCOTE PM100 QUICK RENDER

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 55

Page 56: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Polymer modified cement-based dry plaster mix.

Light weight polymer-modified Portland cement based dry plaster mix with recycled polystyrene beading. 2.3 ROCKCOTE LITEROCK SOLID RENDER

Water-based acrylic polymer based high build coating. 2.4 ROCKCOTE POLYMER RENDER

Waterborne mineral filled acrylic polymer-based high build coating with fungicide colour tinted. 2.5 ACRYLIC TEXTURE

Acrylic waterproofing membrane, colour selection from Resene Total Colour System.

Components

2.6 RESENE X-200

Resene Construction Systems alkali-resistant fibreglass woven mesh.  Low impact areas, weave 5 x 7mm x 160 g/m².

2.7 REINFORCING MESH

Corner flashing with either 120 x 80mm or 60 x 90mm mesh attached to the flashing.

Accessories

2.8 CORNER MESHES

Perforated uPVC cavity closer/vermin proofed ventilated starter strip bottom channel for base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions, over openings (windows, meters, etc).  Length and width to suit cavity.  Installation to be main contractor responsibility.

2.9 EXTERIOR CAVITY BASE VENTED STARTER STRIP

Resene Construction Systems proprietary profiles made from rigid uPVC.  LiteRock jamb and sill flashings, Resene Construction Systems slim angle, LiteRock starter track, horizontal and vertical control joints, head flashing stop ends.

2.10 FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES

BRANZ appraised modified silicon (MS) sealant. 2.11 SEALANT

Rockcote MultiStop bedding compound. 2.12 ADHESION PRIMER (UPVC)

Liquid non solvent polymer based construction adhesive to the Resene Construction Systems requirements. 2.13 ADHESIVE

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Keep plaster products dry in transit.  Take delivery of plaster products dry and undamaged.  Reject all damaged materials.

3.1 DELIVERY

Deliver all materials in original unopened packaging with labels intact.  Provide dry storage on site, stack carefully, clear of direct contact with concrete surfaces and protected from mechanical damage.  Do not store PVC corner beads in direct sunlight.

3.2 STORAGE

Carry out plastering to Resene Construction Systems specification under conditions which will not adversely affect the finished work.

3.3 PLASTERING CONDITIONS

Before application of plaster, apply masking film and tape to all joinery, pipes, roofs and all areas likely to be marked by the plaster.  Use drop cloths and ground covers to keep the working areas clean.  Clean off droppings onto finished work immediately.

3.4 PROTECT

3.5 SUBSTRATE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 56

Page 57: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Do not begin the application until required openings and apertures have been cut, pipes, fixtures, fixing pads and plugs have been fixed and flashings and other preparation are complete.  Do not commence plastering until substrate is of the required standard.  All defects in substrate must be rectified by the main contractor prior to application of plaster coatings commencing.

Comply to the Resene Construction Systems penetration flashing guidelines.  Carry out to the required standard of execution to ensure water does not penetrate.

3.6 FLASHING AND DETAILING

To the standard required by the Resene Construction Systems, plumb, level and in true alignment to either timber or steel framing.  Timber framing  must be to NZS 3604 or to a specific design to NZS 3603.  Steel framing must be 0.55mm thick minimum to a specific design to AS/NZS 4600.

3.7 ALIGNMENT OF FRAMING

Before commencing work confirm the layout of expansion joints and other visual detailing of the finished work.

Application

3.8 CONFIRM LAYOUT

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding.  Required preparatory work includes the following:

� wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames and other penetrations

� claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings � installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating elements). � where electrical cables pass through cladding, ensure that there is no direct contact with the LiteRock

Solid Plaster Facade System, conduit required to be installed by electrician.

3.9 PENETRATIONS

Fix in place required uPVC trims, profiles flashings and control joints.  Service penetrations such as piping and light fittings to be sealed by specific trade.

3.10 PENETRATION FLASHINGS

Provide control joints at locations as specified by the designer and to Resene Construction Systems requirements.  Vertical control joints to be provided at 5.4 metres maximum in the plaster to coincide with movement joints in the background and/or junctions between dissimilar backgrounds in the same plane and/or where shown on the drawings and to Resene Construction Systems requirements.  Horizontal control joints to be provided at inter-storey junctions.  Reinforcing mesh is not continuous across control joints.  Exposed control joints to be reflected through final coatings from substrate.  Inter-storey drainage joints must be provided for walls over two storeys in height in accordance with the requirements of NZBC E2/AS1 9.1.9.4(b).  Confirm locations in writing to the owner before work commences.

3.11 MOVEMENT CONTROL JOINTS

To NZBC E2/AS1 4.0, Flashings.  Check and ensure head flashings have been installed.  Fit flashings to jambs and sill on recessed joinery using Resene Construction Systems proprietary flashings.  Reinforce external corners and bottom edges of polystyrene sheets with uPVC angles and channel extrusions to Resene Construction Systems technical and installation manual.

3.12 FIT FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES

Apply 7mm EPS screeds to all fibre cement sheet joints (excluding sheet joints that are control joints) with panel adhesive.

Resene Construction Systems - LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System

3.13 EPS SCREEDS

Apply key coat plaster with a notched trowel 4-6mm thickness maximum based on a mixture of 100% Acrylbond diluted with water and Rockcote PM100 Quick Render.  Leave 8 hours or longer depending on drying conditions before application of LiteRock Solid Render.

3.14 SCRATCH COAT

Apply LiteRock Solid Render evenly at 8-10mm thickness minimum.  Straightedge the plaster and fill in any deviations in the plaster.  Embed fibreglass mesh into the wet plaster.  Overlap each successive length by 100mm minimum.  Ensure that the mesh is carried over all screeds and not cut between.  The mesh is to terminate each side of control joints.  Mesh must not be exposed but retained as close to the surface as possible.  Apply sticky mesh around all external corners and into all window reveals.  Apply diagonal reinforcement strips at all corners of windows, doors and other exterior openings.

3.15 MESH COAT

3.16 LEVELLING COAT

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 57

Page 58: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Apply by trowel or pump second coat of Rockcote PM 100 Quick Render 1-2mm thickness.  Trowel flat and leave to touch dry before floating off with a large plastic float and water, to remove any imperfections and leave a level surface.

Application - acrylic selection

Apply Rockcote Polymer Render coat to Resene Construction Systems requirements. 3.17 POLYMER RENDER APPLICATION

Apply Texture coat 1mm thickness minimum to achieve the specified finish and colour (optional) to Resene Construction Systems requirements.

3.18 ACRYLIC TEXTURED FINISH COAT

Apply two coats of Resene X-200 reinforced waterproof membrane to achieve a protective acrylic based finish. 3.19 PROTECTIVE FINISH COAT

Refer to SELECTIONS for system texture and colour.

Completion

3.20 FINISHING

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site relating to the plaster system application.  Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements.  Leave the whole of this work to the required standard.

3.21 CLEANING

A final inspection by Resene Construction Systems authorised applicator and project assessor of the entire finished cladding to take place immediately after completion of the wall cladding work and any defects or subsequent damage made good immediately.

3.22 FINAL INSPECTION

For further details on selections go to www.reseneconstruction.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Materials

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 RESENE CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER SYSTEM - ACRYLIC FINISH

Location Below aluminium joinery cills, above low level aluminium joinery heads, beside aluminium joinery jambs, at junctions with Craftstone stone panel cladding

Substrate 6mm Fibre cement backing board Scratch coat: Rockcote PM100 Quick Render / 100% Acrylbond Basecoat 1st layer: Rockcote LiteRock Solid Render; plus Fibreglass mesh Second layer: Rockcote PM100 Quick Render Sealer coat: Rockcote Polymer Render Texture coat: Acrylic Texture Texture finish: Resene Sandflex Standard Texture colour: Colour to LRV of 40% minimum Paint coat: Resene X-200 Paint colour: To be advised - light colour

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 58

Page 59: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING

  This section relates to the supply and fixing of Dimond profiled roofing and includes:

� Metal roofing � accessories

  The scope includes all roofing areas shown on drawing 1535 GA.20 New Roof Plan and all spoutings from Calder Stewart. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.19 New roof framing plan

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4710P  Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation

1.1 RELATED WORK

The following abbreviations are used throughout this part of the specification:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS

BMT Base metal thickness NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc MS Modified silicone

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:  

  Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC E2/AS1 External Moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of zinc

and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium AS 3566 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings ISO 9223 Corrosion of metals and alloys - Corrosivity of atmosphere - Classification

determination and estimation NZMRM CoP NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Web only based:  Dimond Roofing and Cladding Systems Manual   Available from: Dimond web site

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Web: www.dimond.co.nz Telephone 0800 346 663 (0800 DIMOND)

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:.

  � Provide this warranty on Dimond standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

15 years: for failure of coating adhesion 15 years: for weatherproofing by material penetration

Provide an installer/applicator warranty:

 

1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

5 years from the date of completion of the roof

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 59

Page 60: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

� Provide this warranty on Roofing installers standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Include a copy of the Dimond maintenance requirements with the warranty. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR for additional requirements.   Provide all relevant Dimond maintenance information on completion of the roofing work, as required by the GENERAL sections.

Requirements

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Roofers to be Dimond Recommended Installer, or experienced, competent roofers familiar with Dimond products.  And for Restricted Building Work, shall also be an LBP or supervised by an LBP. Carry out work with experienced, competent installers familiar with the products being used and with appropriate qualifications such as the National Certificate in Metal Roofing and Cladding

Performance - Wind

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

Building wind zone: Medium/ 0.85 kPa ULS(refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4) Refer to Dimond for "Wind Load Span Capacity charts".

1.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

Design and use the fixings/fixing pattern appropriate for the wind design parameters. Refer to Dimond Technical Information for load span tables and fixing charts for the selected profile.  Allow for specific loadings at corners and the periphery of the roof, where localised pressure factors apply.  Fixing pattern to also take into account fixing method and purlin spacings.

Performance - General

1.10 FIXINGS, WIND

Co-ordinate to ensure substrate and preparatory work is complete and other work programmed in the order required for access and completion of the roof.  Ensure that all necessary members are positioned so that flashings can be fastened at both edges through the roof profile or cladding to the primary structure.

1.11 CO-ORDINATE

Select installation method of the roof materials and accept responsibility for the weather-tight performance of the completed roofing system including penetrations through the roof and junctions with walls and parapets.

1.12 PERFORMANCE

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Formability steel sheet, G550 for roll forming or G300 for flashings, coated to AS 1397.

Fixings

2.1 PRE-FINISHED HOT-DIPPED ALUMINIUM/ZINC COATED STEEL

Fixings and fasteners are to be compatible with all materials, the environment and meeting the requirements of the NZ Building Code.  Installation is to be in accordance with E2/AS1 and/or the NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice and Dmond requirements. For fixing patterns refer to Dimond Fixing Charts for the selected profile.

2.2 FASTENERS GENERALLY

To AS 3566.  Screws appropriate to the roofing material and the supporting structure, as required by Dimond and with a minimum Class 4 or 5  durability and not less than the material being fixed.  Screw into timber to penetrate by minimum 30mm.  Screw fasteners to be head stamped identifying the manufacturer and class.  Use Alutite or stainless steel with aluminium based sheets.  Refer to SELECTIONS.

Components

2.3 FIXING SCREWS

To NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. 2.4 FLASHINGS GENERALLY

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 60

Page 61: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Formable grade 0.55 BMT for galvanized, aluminium/zinc, aluminium/zinc/magnesium - coated and pre-painted steel, and 0.90 for aluminium to the same standards as the profiled sheets, notched where across profile or provided with a soft edge.

Supplied by the roofing manufacturer to match or to suit the roofing in the same material as the roof. 2.5 FLASHINGS TO VERGE, RIDGE AND HIP

Generally to E2/AS1, 8.4.17 Roof penetrations(note; E2/AS1, Figure.54 Soaker flashing for pipe penetration, has an error, use as guide only) EPDM proprietary pipe flashing laid on 45° bias to roofing, with over-flashing (soaker flashing) if required. A boot flashing should be positioned so that it dams a roofing pan no more than 50%, if this cannot be avoided use an over-flashing back to the ridge and fix the boot flashing to that.

Accessories

2.6 BOOT FLASHINGS

Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 2.7 WIRE NETTING AND SAFETY MESH

Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft  underlays, foils and DPC 2.8 UNDERLAY AND REFLECTIVE FOIL

Neutral curing MS sealant or polymer sealant as required by the roofing manufacturer and used as directed. 2.9 SEALANT

Non-bituminous compressible, profiled foam strips to fit the sheet profile. 2.10 CLOSURE STRIPS

Closed cell self adhesive nitrile tape. 2.11 LAP SEALING TAPE

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Inspect the roof framing and supporting structure to ensure that it is complete and fully braced ready for roofing and free from any misalignments or protrusions that could damage the roofing.

3.1 INSPECTION

When continuous metal cladding etc. Runs along a long continuous timber member and is directly fixed to it, the timbers equilibrium moisture content (EMC) to be 18% or less.  For flashings in this situation (sometimes called transverse flashings) the framing EMC to be maximum 16%, and preferably as low as 12%.  Transverse flashings can be temporarily tacked in place and final fixing done when moisture content is acceptable.

3.2 FRAMING TIMBER MOISTURE

Upon delivery, visually inspect all sheets for any damage and accept packs of roofing undamaged on delivery.  Reject all damaged material.  Store on a level firm base with packs well ventilated and completely protected from weather and damage.  Do not allow moisture to build up between sheets.  If sheet packs become wet, fillet or cross stack to allow air movement between sheets.

3.3 STORAGE

Avoid distortion and contact with damaging substances, including cement.  Do not drag sheets across each other and other materials.  Protect edges and surface finishes from damage.  Use soft, flat sole shoes when fixing and for all other work on the roof.  Walk along the purlin line whenever possible.

3.4 HANDLING

Isolate dissimilar materials in close proximity as necessary by painting the surfaces or fitting separator strips of compatible or inert materials.  Place isolators between metals and treated timber, cement based materials, and mixing aluminium sheet and steel mesh.  Do not use unpainted lead sheet or copper in contact with or allow water run-off onto galvanized or aluminium/zinc coated steel.

Application

3.5 SEPARATION

Refer to Thermal Insulation section. 3.6 FIX INSULATION

3.7 SET-OUT

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 61

Page 62: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Carefully set out with consideration of the position of side laps to take account of the prevailing wind and line of sight.  Ensure all sheets are square and oversailing the gutter true to line.  Check during fixing to eliminate creep or spread and string lines along purlin centres to keep fastenings in line.

End laps should be avoided, except where specifically detailed. 3.8 END LAPS

For sheet lengths more than 18 metres, make provision for thermal expansion where required 3.9 THERMAL MOVEMENT

Install and fix in accordance with the Dimond required fixing patterns and details for each area of the building roofing.  Use only screws as required by the roofing manufacturer.  Paint colour matched fixings and accessories before installation.

3.10 FIXING GENERALLY

Use chalk line, Chinagraph pencils or coloured pencil for marking roof sheets prior to cutting.  Do not use lead pencil for marking Zincalume®, ZAM®, Colorsteel® and Colorcote®.  Cut by shear only, using nibblers or hand snips.  Remove all cutting and drilling debris from the roof.

3.11 MARKING AND CUTTING

Fix sheets in place using the fastening system required by Dimond for specified profiles, making due allowance for dynamic local wind pressures on the building and thermal movement in the sheet.

3.12 FIX SHEETS

Form stop-ends at the upper end of sheets.  Form downturns at the gutter line where the roof pitch is less than 8 degrees.  Form using the required tools.

3.13 STOP ENDS AND DOWNTURNS

Flash roof to parapets, walls and penetrations to detail.  Flashings to be installed on timber framing with moisture content of less than 18%.  Where no detail is provided flash to NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice recommendations and Dimond requirements.  Cut accurately and fix using sealant and rivets to detail and to Dimond requirements to form a weatherproof cover.  For highly visible flashings, plan joints/junction to take account of the aesthetic requirements.

3.14 FLASHINGS

Separate metal sheeting from CCA treated timber with an inert isolation material such as flashing tape, underlayment mat or similar.  Contact Dimond for other options.

3.15 SEPARATION

Select and use sealants only as recommended by Dimond.  Remove any swarf and clean down, apply sealant in two narrow beads transversely across flashing intersections, close to the two edges.  Avoid exposing sealant on outside surfaces.

3.16 USE OF SEALANTS

Flash all penetrations through the roof.  Fit pipe flashings with a proprietary collar flashing, with other penetrations flashed as detailed and to provide a weathertight installation.  Ensure that flashings are set to avoid any ponding of water.

Completion

3.17 FLASHING PENETRATIONS

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.18 REPLACE

Leave this work complete with all necessary flashings, undercloaks, valleys, ridges and hips all properly installed as the work proceeds so the finished roof is completely weathertight.

3.19 LEAVE

Remove trade rubbish and unused materials from the roof and surrounds daily during the work.  Sweep down at the end of each day, and clean out spouting, gutters and rainwater pipes on completion of the roof.  Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

3.20 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.dimond.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Coating system

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 COATING SYSTEM - EXPOSURE ZONE B-C (CAT 1-3)

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 62

Page 63: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Project Exposure Zone B-C to NZS 3604, C 1-3 to ISO 9223.

Roofing

Profile/location: Corrugate profile  /  High level roofs Base material: 0.55mm BMT Alum/Zinc coated steel Coating system: Colorsteel Endura Paint colour: To be advised

4.2 DIMOND CORRUGATE ROOFING

BMT/material 0.55 BMT Alum/Zinc coated steel Purlin material: 240 X 45 H1.2 rafters in part of high level roof, 70 x 45 H1.2 purlins

to trussed area Fixing: Class 4, 12-11x50 type 17 Woodteks with corrugated load

spreading profile metal washers and 30mm EPDM Fixing pattern: Refer to Dimond Corrugated literature for details

Accessories

4.3 DIMOND VEEDEK ROOFING

BMT/material 0.55mm BMT Alum/Zinc coated steel Purlin material: 70 x 45 H1.2 timber at 1200 centres on rafters at 900 crs Fixing: Class 4, 14-10x75 Type 17 Woodteks with neos with Veedek load

spreading profile metal washers and 36mm EPDM Fixing pattern: Refer to Dimond Veedek literature for details

4.4 FLASHINGS - GENERALLY

Profile: As detailed BMT/material: 0.55mm BMT / Alum/Zinc coated steel Coating system: To match roofing Paint colour: To match roofing

4.5 CLOSURE STRIPS

Brand: Non bituminous profiled compressed foam strips

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 63

Page 64: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS

  This section relates to the fabrication, supply and installation by either an Altherm, First or Vantage manufacturer of

� APL Architectural Series aluminium windows and doors � 40mm commercial window systems � Hardware and furniture � Flashings and sealants

  The scope includes all windows as shown on drawings 1535 GA.12, GA.30, GA.40 to 44 and GA.75.  Magnum entrance doors are included as single leaf double action pivot doors. The scope also includes provision of aluminium section sub frame, top support members and bottom stabilising members for sun shading panels on the north elevation.

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 4161T  Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster facade System Refer to 4231HW  James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding Refer to 4611ME  Metro Glasstech Exterior Glazing

1.1 RELATED WORK

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS

SLS Serviceability limit state ULS Ultimate limit state WANZ Windows Association of New Zealand PQAS Powder Coating Quality Assurance System

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:  

1.3 DOCUMENTS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 64

Page 65: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

  US Federal Specification

NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC H1/VM1 Energy efficiency NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency AS/NZS 1580.108.1 Methods of test for paints and related materials - Determination of dry film

thickness on metallic substrates - Non destructive methods AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate AS/NZS 1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow

shapes AAMA 2604.05 Performance requirements and test procedures for high performance

organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural applications BS 3900 Methods of tests for paints, Part C5: Determination of film thickness NZS 4211 Specification for performance of windows NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles WANZ Installation Guide The WANZ Guide to Window Installation as described in E2/AS1

Amendment 5 WANZ PQAS Powder Coating Quality Assurance System WANZ SFA 3503-03 Anodic Oxide coatings on wrought aluminium for external architectural

application (2005) BRANZ BU 337 Protecting Window Glass from Surface Damage AAMA 2604 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures

for high performance organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels

AAMA 2605 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures for superior performing organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels

TT-S-001543A Sealing compound, silicone rubber base (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures)

TT-S-00230C Sealing compound, elastomeric type, single component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures)

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are contained within: Altherm Specifier's Guide First Specifier's Guide Vantage Specifier's Guide   Copies of the above literature are available from:

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Web: www.altherm.co.nz   www.firstwindows.co.nz   www.vantagejoinery.com   www.aplnz.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 309 3251 Facsimile: 09 309 3298

Provide a material manufacturer/fabricator warranty: 5 years: For fabrication   Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 2 years: For installation  

� Provide this warranty in the installer/applicator standard form.

1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 65

Page 66: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Not required 1.7 SAMPLES

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified APL aluminium system, or associated components and products.

1.8 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

Windows and doors to be manufactured and installed to NZBC E2/AS1. 1.10 COMPLIANCE

Shop drawings to show the general arrangement of the aluminium joinery including, but not be limited to: Construction details (minimum scale 1:5) showing the interface between joinery elements and the building structure including: -

� Jointing details and method of fixing between individual elements and between this installation and adjacent work

� Interaction between claddings and linings � Flashing details � Sealants and air seals � Non standard fixing details including bracketing

  And where required the following: -

� Rebate sizes � Dimensions of all typical elements and of any special sizes and shapes � Provision for the exclusion and/or drainage of moisture � Sealant types and full size sections of all sealants and backing rods � Provision for thermal movement � Provision for seismic movement and movement under wind loads � Sequence of installation � Glazing specification and details

  Complete shop drawing review before commencing fabrication.

1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS

Provide evidence of a certificate by a laboratory accredited by International Accreditation of New Zealand that the windows and doors offered comply with the requirements of NZS 4211.

Performance

1.12 CERTIFICATION

To NZS 4211, including: � deflection, opening sashes, air infiltration, water penetration, ultimate strength, torsional strength of

sashes, marking. Refer to SELECTIONS.

1.13 PERFORMANCE - WINDOWS AND DOORS

The structural and weather-tight performance of the completed joinery, the glazing and infill panels is the responsibility of the window fabricator.

Performance - Wind (design by contractor)

1.14 STRUCTURAL/WEATHER-TIGHTNESS

Design the installation to the wind zone parameters of NZS 3604, table 5.1. Refer to SELECTIONS for wind zone.

Finishes

1.15 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

Certify on request, compliance with this specification and support with control and sampling records.  Test for film thickness to BS 3900, part C5, method No. 4, using method (b) or to AS/NZ 1580.108.1 for certifying thickness and method (a) where any dispute arises as to the thickness provided.

1.16 CERTIFY COATINGS - POWDER COATING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 66

Page 67: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

The coating should be applied by an applicator who can certify that the coating has been applied in accordance with the specification.

2 PRODUCTS

Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. 2.1 WINDOWS

Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. 2.2 DOORS

Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish.

Materials

2.3 MAGNUM DOORS

Alloy designation to comply with AS/NZS 1866.  Branded and extruded for anodising or powder coating. 2.4 ALUMINIUM EXTRUSIONS

Complying with AS/NZS 1734 of suitable thickness. Rolled for anodising or powder coating. 2.5 ALUMINIUM SHEET AND STRIP

Alloy designation: 5251 - H16 or 5005 - H16

Refer to 4611ME  Metro Glasstech Exterior Glazing

2.6 GLASS

Timber reveals for paint finish with all sides primed grooved for wall linings or flush finished for architraves.

Accessories

2.7 REVEALS - TIMBER PAINTED

To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10 Windows and Doors.  Material, grade and colour of head flashings to match the window frames.  Ensure that materials used for head, jamb and sill flashings are compatible with the window frame materials and fixings and cladding materials.

Components for installation - cavity systems

2.8 FLASHINGS GENERALLY

A device constructed from either aluminium or PVC to close the cavity above the window or door unit, between the cladding and head flashing, to provide ventilation in accordance with NZBC E2/AS1 to the spaces above the window or door.

2.9 STANDARD CAVITY CLOSER

Extruded aluminium support bar with built in drainage and ventilation to NZBC E2/AS1, to provide continuous support to the window unit.  Size to suit cladding type.

Components

2.10 WANZ SUPPORT BAR

Thermoplastic rubber.  Do not stretch glazing gaskets during installation.  Measure and cut gaskets 5-10% over length before installation.

2.11 GLAZING GASKETS

Hinges, stays, catches, fasteners, latches, locks and furniture as offered by the window and door manufacturer.  Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish.  Key alike all lockable window hardware able to be keyed alike.

2.12 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE

Stainless steel non releasable restrictors to limit window opening to NZBC F4/AS1, Table 2, Acceptable opening sizes for barriers. Top hung windows with restrictor stays to open a maximum of 150mm

2.13 SAFETY STAYS

Designed by manufacturer to specific design.

Sealants

2.14 FIXING BRACKETS

2.15 WEATHERING/INSTALLATION SEALANT

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 67

Page 68: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Building sealant used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for weather sealing aluminium frames to the cladding, complying with US Federal Specification TT S 0011534A, or a one-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint sealant of medium modulus (± 25% movement) to US Federal Specification TT S 00230C.

Finishes

Polyester powder organic coating in accordance with WANZ PQAS and AS 3715. 2.16 DURALLOY POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM

Conditions - generally

3 EXECUTION

Do not deliver to site any elements which cannot be unloaded immediately into suitable conditions of storage. 3.1 DO NOT DELIVER

Unload, handle and store elements in accordance with the window manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 UNLOAD WINDOW JOINERY

Avoid distortion of elements during transit, storage and handling. 3.3 AVOID DISTORTION

Store windows and doors on site in a clean and dry environment in such a manner as to prevent damage to prefinished surfaces.  Stack the units in a vertical position resting on their sills, with layers interleaved between to prevent rubbing.  Keep paper and cardboard wrappings dry.

3.4 PREVENT DAMAGE

Retain protective coverings and coatings to BRANZ BU 337 and keep in place during the fixing process.  Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades.  Remove protection on completion.

Conditions - fixings and fastenings

3.5 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS.  Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium, or Type 316 stainless steel or if not exposed to the weather may they be hot-dip galvanized steel with a coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680.

3.6 SUPPLY OF FIXINGS

To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10.8, Attachments for windows and doors.  Fix windows/doors through reveal to frame with a pair of 75 x 3.15mm minimum galvanised jolt head nails or a pair of 8 gauge x 65mm minimum stainless steel screws.  Fix at a maximum of 450 centres along all reveals and a maximum of 150mm from reveal ends.  Ensure fixings do not penetrate metal flashings. Install packers between reveals and framing at fixing points, except at the head.

Assembly

3.7 INSTALLATION FIXING

Fabricate frames as detailed on shop drawings.  Install fixing brackets, glazing, hinges, stays and running gear as scheduled.  Provide temporary bracing and protection.  Temporarily secure all opening elements for transportation.

3.8 FABRICATION

Before fixing to aluminium frames, ensure that timber reveals which are being painted have been primed on all surfaces.  Securely fix reveals through aluminium fin.

3.9 TIMBER REVEALS

Factory fit all required and scheduled hardware.  Account for all keys and deliver separately to the site manager.

3.10 HARDWARE GENERALLY

Factory fit safety stays to all windows scheduled for safety stays and to all windows where safety stays are required to comply with NZBC F4/AS1 4.0, Opening windows.

Installation - windows and doors

3.11 SAFETY STAYS

3.12 SUPPLY OF FIXINGS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 68

Page 69: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS.

Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium, or Type 304 stainless steel. 3.13 EXPOSED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS

Fixings and fastenings not exposed to the weather may be hot-dip galvanized steel with a coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680.

3.14 PROTECTED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS

Before fixing, apply suitable barriers of bituminous coatings, stops or underlays between dissimilar metals in contact, or between aluminium in contact with concrete.

3.15 CORROSION PROTECTION

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames. Do not proceed with the window and door installation until required preparatory work has been completed.   Required preparatory work includes the following:

� wall cladding underlay/building wrap to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames to NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.5 Wall underlays to wall openings

� claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings � installation of flashings (those which are required to be installed prior to frames). � application of waterproof sealer to all door and window sills in concrete floor or concrete sill situations.

To door sills only, apply a suitable membrane over the sealer. � all in accordance with the shop drawings, where applicable.

3.16 CONFIRM PREPARATION OF EXTERIOR WALL OPENINGS

Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details including flashings and bedding compounds, pointing sealants and weathering sealants.

3.17 INSTALLATION

Install to WANZ Installation Guide details and drawings including WANZ sill support bars. For thresholds with support bars fixed through membranes, pre-fill support bar screw holes with silicone sealant to NZBC E2/AS1, figure 62(d).

3.18 INSTALLATION CAVITY CONSTRUCTION

Install flashings to heads, jambs and sills of frames as supplied and required by the window manufacturer and as detailed on the drawings. Finish head flashings to match window finish.   Place all flashings so that the head flashing weathers the jamb flashings, which in turn weathers over the upstand of the sill flashing. Ensure that sill flashings drain to the outside air.   Except where window/door frames are recessed, ensure that head flashings over-sail unit by 20mm plus any jamb scriber width at each end.

3.19 INSTALL FLASHINGS

To NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.6 Air seals.  Form an air-tight seal by means of proprietary expanding foam or sealants used with PEF backing rods, applied between the window / door reveal and structural framing to a depth of 10 - 20mm, to provide a continuous air tight seal to the perimeter of the window or door.

3.20 COMPLETE AIR SEAL

Fix all sash and door hardware and furniture as scheduled.

Installation - Roof windows and overhead glazing system

3.21 FIX HARDWARE

Check that the trimmed openings are formed and constructed to suit the required units.  Do not proceed until roof and structural openings are properly formed.  Install flashings and overflashings as detailed and as required to make the installation completely weatherproof.  Install and fix the roof window units strictly in accordance with the roof window manufacturer's requirements and installation instructions.

Application - jointing and sealing

3.22 INSTALL ROOF WINDOWS AND OVERHEAD GLAZING SYSTEMS

Seal frames to each other and to adjoining structure and finishes, to the requirements of the window and sealant manufacturer and to make the installation weathertight.  In very high and extra high or greater wind zones, seal between the window head and the head flashing.  Do not seal the junction between the sill member and the cladding or sill flashing which must remain open.

3.23 SEAL FRAMES ON SITE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 69

Page 70: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Ensure joints are dry.  Remove loose material, dust and grease.  Prepare joints in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's requirements, using required solvents and primers where necessary.  Mask adjoining surfaces which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant.

3.24 PREPARE JOINTS

When using back-up materials do not reduce depth of joint for sealant to less than the minimum required by the manufacturer of the sealant.  Insert polyethylene rod or tape back-up behind joints being pointed with sealant.

3.25 BACK UP

Tool sealant to form a smooth fillet with a profile and dimensions required by the sealant manufacturer.  Remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces, using the cleaning materials nominated by the sealant manufacturer and leave clean.

Completion - cleaning

3.26 SEALANT FINISH

Remove trade debris by appropriate means on a floor by floor basis as each floor is completed and again before any work is covered up by others.  Arrange for general removal.

3.27 REMOVE TRADE DEBRIS

Trade clean window frames, operable windows and doors, glass and other related surfaces inside and out at the time of installation to remove marks, dust and dirt, to enable a visual inspection of all surfaces.

Completion

3.28 TRADE CLEAN

Retain protective coverings and coatings and keep in place during the fixing process.  Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades.  Remove protection on completion.

3.29 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. 3.30 REPLACE

Protect finishes against damage from adjacent and following work. 3.31 PROTECTION

In situ touch-up of polyester or fluoropolymer coated aluminium is only permitted to minor surface scratching.  Otherwise replace all damaged material.

3.32 IN - SITU TOUCH-UP TO POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM

Indicate the presence of transparent glasses for the remainder of the contract period, with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type.  Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface.  Masking tape must not be used for this purpose.

3.33 SAFETY

Apply manifestations to comply with NZS 4223.3, 303.1 Manifestations. 3.34 MANIFESTATIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to the following selections.

4 SELECTIONS

Supply and installation of the specified APL aluminium joinery system.

Performance

4.1 SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION

Supply: By fabricator Installation: By main contractor

4.2 THERMAL PERFORMANCE

R-value: R0.26 (as determined from NZBC H1/VM1 or H1/AS1)

For NZS 4211, table 3 Air infiltration. 4.3 AIR INFILTRATION

Non-air conditioned zones:

Reception area to be air conditioned later

Air conditioned zones: Offices and staff areas

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 70

Page 71: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Performance - Wind (design by contractor)

Finishes

4.4 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

Building wind zone Medium 37 m/s (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.1)

GLAZING - REFER TO SECTION 4611ME BELOW

HARDWARE

4.5 DURALLOY - POWDER COATING FINISH

Type: Polyester organic powder coating System integrity: Minimum 10 years film integrity, 7 years colour integrity Thickness: Average of 80 microns with a minimum of 50 microns Colour: Palladium Silver Kinetic

 

4.6 WINDOW HARDWARE

Window fastener: Standard

Location Item All top hung opening sashes

Safety stays - non releasable

    All top hung opening sashes

Sash locks

   

4.7 DOOR HARDWARE - REFER TO THE HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Flashings and Sealant

4.8 HARDWARE FINISH

Finish: Powder coat Colour: To be advised

4.9 FLASHINGS

Material/type: 0.55mm BMT Alum/zinc coated steel Pattern: Formed to suit details provided

Reveals

4.10 WEATHERING SEALANT

Type: Sikaflex MS sealant Colour:  

WINDOW SYSTEM - APL ARCHITECTURAL SERIES

4.11 TIMBER JAMB REVEALS

Timber species: Radiata pine Grade/treatment: Clears Thickness: 19mm Reveals: Grooved for wall linings Finish: Paint quality

Commercial doors

4.12 APL ARCHITECTURAL SERIES - 40MM WINDOW SERIES

Brand: APL 40mm Window Series Type.: Chair frame Window No.: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.75 Glazing system: Double glazing

4.13 APL MAGNUM DOORS -

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 71

Page 72: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Brand/type: APL Magnum Doors - Pivot doors - single leaf Door No.: nd.01, nd.02 Pivot door frame 40mm Window Series, extended head transom Top rail type: Wide Vision rail: Profile ref 08024 Bottom rail type: Wide Stile type: Wide

4.14 SUN SHADING PANEL SUPPORT MEMBERS - REFER RO DRAWING 1535 GD.21

Sub frame 40 x 40 x 3 aluminium box section Top support members 40 x 40 x 5 aluminium box section Bottom stabilising members

40 x 40 x 3 aluminium box section

 

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 72

Page 73: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING

  This section relates to the supply and fixing of Metro GlassTech products for external joinery in complex residential and commercial buildings, including:

� window and doors

1 GENERAL

Refer to 4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors 1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.   The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

PVB Polyvinyl Butyral CIP Cast in place

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC F2/AS1 Hazardous building materials NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC H1/AS1 Energy Efficiency NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 4211 Specification for performance of windows NZS 4218 Thermal insulation - Housing and Small Buildings NZS 4223.1 Glazing in buildings - Glass selection and glazing NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements NZS 4223.4 Glazing in buildings - Wind, dead, snow and live action NZS 4223.Supp1 Glazing in buildings - Supplement 1 to NZS 4223.1:2008 and NZS

4223.4:2008 AS/NZS 2208 Safety glazing materials in buildings AS/NZS 4666 Insulating glass units BRANZ BU 337 Protecting window glass from damage

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Metro GlassTech Catalogue & Reference Guide - 6th edition   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Metro GlassTech Web: www.metroglasstech.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 65 89 45

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the manufacturer/supplier standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of completion of this part of the contract work.

Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.

Requirements

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

10 years: for insulating glass units 10 years: for laminated safety glass 10 years: for toughened safety glass 10 years: for screen printed glass

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 73

Page 74: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Submit samples of selected glass for review if required.

Performance

1.6 SAMPLES

For non heat treated glass obtain a thermal stress analysis for spandrel panels, tinted, reflective and other solar control vision glass including IGU's for review before placing final order.

1.7 THERMAL STRESS ANALYSIS

Provide glazing to meet the energy requirements of,  NZS 4218 and NZBC H1/AS1 for housing small buildings, or NZS 4243.1 for large buildings. Refer to SELECTIONS and schedules for location and type of glazing.

1.8 ENERGY EFFICIENCY

2 PRODUCTS

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Metro GlassTech, products or systems.

Materials

2.1 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Clear ordinary annealed transparent float glass for general window glazing.  Thickness to NZS 4223.1 and NZS 4223. Supp 1.

2.2 CLEAR FLOAT GLASS

Translucent, annealed, rolled glass with a decorative pattern on one surface. 2.3 TEXTURED, PATTERNED OR OBSCURE GLASS

With 13mm square welded, treated steel wire mesh in the centre. 2.4 WIRED GLASS

Safelite Grade A Safety Glass to AS/NZS 2208 with PVB or CIP resin interlayer. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

Body tinted float glass. 2.6 TINTED FLOAT GLASS

IGU's to AS/NZS 4666 and the IGU Manufacturers Association (IGUMA) requirements.

Components, general

2.7 GLASSTECH INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S)

Ensure jointing, putty and sealing materials are compatible with glass substrates.  Confirm compatibility with laminated glass, IGU's and coatings.

Components, timber glazing

2.8 JOINTING, PUTTY AND SEALING MATERIALS

Linseed oil base glazing putty.  Not to be used with Tinted, Laminate or IGU's 2.9 PUTTY, TIMBER FRAME

Diamond metal pieces to retain glass in timber sashes and frames. 2.10 SPRIGS

Single/double sided pressure sensitive self-adhesive low/medium/high density foam tapes/butyl tapes for bead glazing.

2.11 GLAZING TAPE

PVC or Santoprene to window manufacturers' requirements. 2.12 GASKETS

Santoprene/Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A hardness, set at quarter points or to detail, to support the weight of glass panes.  Use with bead glazing and for IGU's.

Components, aluminium glazing

2.13 SETTING BLOCKS

2.14 GLAZING TAPE AND GASKETS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 74

Page 75: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Single/double sided pressure sensitive self-adhesive low/medium/high density foam tapes/butyl tapes selected to suit the glazing detail to window manufacturers' requirements.

Santoprene/Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A hardness, set at quarter points or to detail, to support the weight of glass panes.

2.15 SETTING BLOCKS

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

To NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3 and NZS 4223.4 and NZBC B1/AS1, 7.0 Glazing.  All external glazing is wind and watertight on completion.

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Keep glass dry and clean during delivery and bring on to site when ready to glaze directly into place.  Comply also with the storage requirements set out in BRANZ BU 337.

3.2 DELIVERY

All glass to have undamaged edges and surfaces in accordance with AS/NZS 4667. 3.3 GLASS CONDITION

If not specifically stated in the glazing schedule determine the minimum thickness of glass for each sheet as required by NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3 and NZS 4223.4 and NZS 4223. Supp 1.  For windows tested to NZS 4211, ensure glass meets the requirements of the window testing. Determine the final glass thickness based on whether wind loading or human impact considerations govern.

3.4 GLASS THICKNESS

Provide rebates for glazing to the widths and depths necessary for each situation including minimum glass edge cover to NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing.

Conditions - human impact safety requirements

3.5 REBATE DIMENSIONS

Glazing of doors, side panels, low level and window seat glazing, stairwell landings and similar locations to NZS 4223.3 and NZBC B1/AS1, 7.0 Glazing, in respect of thickness, maximum areas and requirements for Grade A Safety Glass.

3.6 SAFETY GLAZING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Use only materials from NZS 4223.3, Appendix 3.A Schedule of safety glazing materials that also comply with the relevant requirements of AS/NZS 2208.  Ensure material is permanently marked and if cut by the distributor or installer mark each piece to NZS 4223.3, clause 303.7 Identification of safety glazing materials.

3.7 SAFETY GLAZING MATERIAL

Edge cover to comply with NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing, table 5.  Otherwise to NZS 4223.3, clause 303.2 Containment.

3.8 CONTAINMENT

To NZS 4223.3, section 309 Shop front glazing, noting particularly adequate edge cover to retain glass under load and manifestation requirements.

Assembly

3.9 SHOP FRONTS

All working of glass as required in NZS 4223.1. 3.10 WORKING OF GLASS

Edgework other than a clean cut.  Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for type. 3.11 EDGE WORK AND BEVELLING

Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish. 3.12 SURFACE TREATMENT

Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish.

Application aluminium

3.13 SURFACE CUTTING

Install glass to NZS 4223.1. 3.14 INSTALL GLASS TO ALUMINIUM FRAMES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 75

Page 76: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

� Bead glaze to Section 4 Glazing. � Channel glaze to Section 4 Glazing, and Section 5 for Framed, Unframed, Partly Framed Glass

Assemblies.

To NZS 4223.3, as modified by NZBC F2/AS1 and NZBC B1/AS1, 7.0 Glazing.

Finishing

3.15 INSTALL SAFETY GLASS

Indicate the presence of transparent glass for the construction period with tape or signs compatible with the glass type.  Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface.

3.16 SAFETY

To NZS 4223.3, clause 303.1 Manifestation (making glass visible).

Completion

3.17 MANIFESTATIONS

Remove safety indicators and trade clean at completion of the building. 3.18 TRADE CLEAN

Replace damaged, cracked or marked glass that occurs during glazing. 3.19 REPLACE

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.21 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.metroglasstech.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Performance - wind

4 SELECTIONS

Building wind zone: Medium (as determined from NZS 3604,  NZS 4223)

Glass by type

4.1 WIND ZONE - NON-SPECIFIC DESIGN

4.2 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - DOORS ND.01, ND.02

Location: Entrance doors Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Laminated Body Tinted Coated surface: 1

Outer glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm Spacer width: 10mm

Space gas: Air Inner glass type: Laminated Safety glass Coated surface: Clear glass

Inner glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm

4.3 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - RECEPTION AREA WINDOWS

Location: Reception area windows Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Laminated Body Tinted for both bottom rows

Annealed glass for the top row of windows and windows above the veranda roof

Coated surface: 1

Outer glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm Spacer width: 10mm

Space gas: Air

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 76

Page 77: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Inner glass type: Laminated Safety glass - for both bottom rows of windows Annealed glass for the top row of windows and all windows above the veranda roof

Coated surface: Clear glass

Inner glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm for laminated 6mm for annealed

4.4 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - WINDOWS GENERALLY

Location: Office areas, staff areas and utility areas Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Body Tinted Coated surface: 1

Outer glass: 6mm Spacer width: 10mm

Space gas: Air Inner glass type: Annealed glass Coated surface: n/a

Inner glass: 6mm

4.5 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - WINDOWS ND.13, 14, 15, 16 - WC'S

Location: Reception area windows Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Annealed glass Coated surface: n/a

Outer glass: 5mm Spacer width: 12mm

Space gas: Air Inner glass type: Annealed glass - frosted Coated surface: n/a

Inner glass: 5mm  

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 77

Page 78: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION

  This section relates to Tasman Insulation Pink® Batts® insulation materials installed into residential buildings. It includes: Thermal:

� Pink® Batts® Wall Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®) � Pink® Batts® Ceiling Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®

Acoustic: � Pink® Batts® Wall insulation

  Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, GA.15, GA.40 to 44 and GD.20, 21, 22

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 5113G  GIB Plasterboard linings Refer to 5311F  Forman Suspended Tile Ceiling Systems Refer to 5313F  Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling Systems

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.   The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

NRC Noise Reduction Coefficient STC Sound Transmission Class IIC Impact Insulation Class

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations NZS 4218:2004 Energy Efficiency - Small building envelope NZS 4220 Code of practice for energy conservation in non-residential buildings NZS 4246 Energy efficiency - Installing insulation in residential buildings AS/NZS 60598.2.2 Luminaires- Particular Requirements - Recessed luminaires AS/NZS 60695.11.5 Fire hazard testing - Test flames - Needle-flame test method - Apparatus,

conformity test arrangement and guidance

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: Tasman Insulation New Zealand: Product Data Sheets BRANZ Appraisal 632 - Pink® Batts® SnugFloor® Underfloor Insulation   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Tasman Insulation New Zealand Web: www.pinkbatts.co.nz Telephone: 0800 PINK BATTS (746 522)

Provide a Tasman insulation guarantee.  

� For Pink® Batts® insulation products. � Provide on completion of the installation, a PinkFit® Home Insulation Installation Guarantee form,

to confirm the insulation has been installed to NZS 4246.

Requirements

1.5 WARRANTY

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS, PINK® BATTS® AND PINK® BATTS® SILENCER®

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 78

Page 79: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Installers to be PinkFit® - Preferred Pink® Batts® installers.  A list of approved installers can be obtained from the web, by telephone or from the local building supplies merchant. Web: www.pinkbatts.co.nz Telephone: Freephone 0800 746 534 (0800 PINKFIT)

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Tasman Insulation Pink® Batts® insulation or associated products, components or accessories.

Performance

1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Provide sound rated wall, floor and ceiling systems as scheduled. 1.8 SOUND RATING REQUIREMENTS

Materials - thermal

2 PRODUCTS

Pink® Batts® Ceiling Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®) is a light weight flexible bio-soluble glass wool manufactured from up to 80% recycled glass, bonded with a thermosetting resin to form rectangular slabs.  Refer to SELECTIONS for R values and thickness options. NOTE: When insulation abutting or covering recessed downlights is intended to be in contact with IC, CA 80, CA 135 luminaries the insulation must withstand a 30s Needle Flame test to AS/NZS 60695.11.5.  Pink® Batts® insulation meets this requirement.

2.1 PINK® BATTS® CEILING INSULATION

Pink® Batts® Wall Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®)is a light weight flexible bio-soluble glass wool manufactured from up to 80% recycled glass, bonded with a thermosetting resin to form rectangular slabs.  Refer to SELECTIONS for R values and thickness options.

Components

2.2 PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION - ALSO ACOUSTIC

Insul anchors complete with retaining washer. 2.3 FASTENERS

Proprietary plastic tape stapled across framing to retain insulation in unlined wall and ceiling locations. 2.4 TAPES

Pressure sensitive adhesive tape. 2.5 ADHESIVE TAPE

3 EXECUTION

Accept materials undamaged and dry and store in a location that protects them from the weather and damage.  Avoid distortion, stretching, compression, puncturing and damage to edges of materials.  Do not use damaged or wet insulation materials.

3.1 STORAGE

Wear protective clothing as necessary and when handling, avoid delamination or distortion of the rectangular form.  Maintain full thickness unless compression is an installation system requirement.

3.2 HANDLING

Before starting installation of blankets and slabs, check that the location and framing are free from moisture, that the cavities are not interconnected and that mesh, wall underlays and vapour barriers are in place.

Application - general

3.3 INSPECTION

Lay, install, fit and fix to NZBC H1/AS1: Energy efficiency, 2.0 Building thermal envelope, and to manufacturer's requirements. Install in housing to NZS 4218 and NZS 4246. Install in large buildings to NZS 4243.1 and NZS 4220. Allow insulation to re-loft/relax prior to installation. Do not cover vents. Allow a clear gap around metal flues as recommended by the fireplace manufacturer. Lift up electrical wires, lighting transformers/controllers and lay the insulation underneath.

3.4 INSTALL INSULATION - GENERAL

Non-residential applications; The clearance between insulation and recessed downlights

3.5 RECESSED LIGHT FITTINGS - CLEARANCE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 79

Page 80: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

� 100mm gap to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9. � Provide larger clearances where required by the light manufacturer.

Application, thermal insulation

Ensure that the product is installed dry; if wet replace before installation.  If cutting is required, cut oversize by 5-10mm to ensure a friction fit.  Insulate around vents (not over them) to allow unhindered ventilation. Fit Pink® Batts® Ceiling Insulation beneath electrical wiring and plumbing.  Install to the outer edge of the top plate.  Maintain a 25mm gap clearance between the Pink® Batts® insulation and roof underlay.  Refer to NZS 4246 for installation guidelines and Pink® Batts® Product Data Sheets, for detailed installation instructions.

3.6 INSTALL PINK® BATTS® CEILING INSULATION

Ensure the product is installed dry; if wet replace before installation.  If cutting is required, cut oversize by 5-10mm to ensure a friction fit. Fill gaps around windows and doors with off-cuts. Insulate around vents (not over them) to allow unhindered ventilation.   Fit Pink® Batts® Wall Insulation behind electrical wiring and plumbing.  Ensure there are no gaps, folds or undesirable compression at edges.   Refer to NZS 4246 for installation guidelines and Pink® Batts® Product Data Sheets, for detailed installation instructions.

3.7 INSTALL PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION

Ensure that the product is installed dry; if wet replace before installation.  If cutting is required, cut oversize by 5mm-10mm to ensure a friction fit.

Application, acoustic insulation

3.8 FIT PINK® BATTS® SKILLION ROOF INSULATION

Install Pink® Batts® Silencer® when lining on one side is installed.  When cutting is required, cut oversize by 5-10mm to ensure a friction fit to completely fill the whole of the cavities.  Fill gaps around with off-cuts.  Fit Pink® Batts® insulation behind electrical wiring and plumbing.  Ensure there are no gaps, folds or undesirable compression at edges.  Maintain full thickness of the insulating panels over the whole of the installation.  Refer to Pink® Batts® Product Data Sheets, for detailed installations.

Completion

3.9 INSTALL PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION

Clean up as the work proceeds, so no spare offcuts or any other matter or item remain behind claddings or linings.

3.10 CLEAN UP

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.11 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.12 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.pinkbatts.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Thermal insulation

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 PINK® BATTS® CLASSIC CEILING INSULATION

Location: At bottom of truss chords between grid lines 4 and 8, and in the skillion roof between grid lines 1 and 4

Brand: Pink® Batts® Classic Ceiling R-value: R3.2 Thickness: 170mm

Acoustic Insulation

4.2 PINK® BATTS® CLASSIC WALL INSULATION

Location: All timber framed external walls Brand: Pink® Batts® Classic Wall R-value: R2.2 Thickness: 90mm

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 80

Page 81: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4.3 PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION

Location: In internal partitions marked SND on drawing 1535 GA.15 Brand/type: Pink® Batts® Wall insulation System STC: 42 (90mm framing; side 1, 13mm GIB Noiseline/ side 2, 13mm GIB

Noiseline) Thickness: 90mm

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 81

Page 82: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS

  This section relates to the supply, fixing and jointing of GIB® plasterboard linings and accessories to timber and steel framed walls and ceilings to form:

� standard systems � bracing systems � wet area systems

  Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 15, 18, 19, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and GD.20, 21, 22. Allow to provide a 13mm GIB Board ceiling lining at 2500 above ffl in the accessible W.C.

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4710P  Pink Batts and Pink Batts Silencer Insulation Refer to 5313F  Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling System Refer to 5151  Internal Trim

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.   The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

AWCINZ Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries New Zealand

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

 

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS2-AS6 Protection from fire NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of zinc

and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium AS/NZS 2588 Gypsum plasterboard AS/NZS 2589 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed steel structures ISO 5660.1 Reaction-to-fire tests - Heat release, smoke production and mass loss

rate - Part 1: Heat release rate (cone calorimeter method) ISO 5660.2 Reaction-to-fire tests - Heat release, smoke production and mass loss

rate - Part 2: Smoke production rate (dynamic measurement)

BRANZ Technical Paper P21

BRANZ Technical Paper P21: A wall bracing test and evaluation procedure (2010)

NASH Residential and Low-Rise Steel Framing Part 1 2010 Design Criteria

Manufacturer’s and supplier’s documents relating to this part of the work: � GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) � GIB® Noise Control Systems (March 2006) � GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems (March 2007) � GIB® Ezybrace® Systems (June 2011), with amendments (Dec 2014) � GIB® Ezybrace® Software (2011), with amendments (Dec 2014) � GIB® Rondo® Metal Ceiling Batten Systems � GIB-Cove® � GIB® Goldline™ Platinum Tape-on Trims (Jan 2006) � GIB® UltraFlex® high impact corner mould (Sept 2004)

BRANZ Appraisal 294 (2011)  - GIB® Ezybrace® Systems BRANZ Appraisal 427 (2007) - GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems   GreenTag Certification - GreenTag™ GreenRate/Level C for:

�    GIB® Standard (10mm & 13mm) �    GIB Braceline® (10mm & 13mm) �    GIB® Noiseline® (10mm & 13mm)

 

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 82

Page 83: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Copies of the above literature are available at

Requirements

Company: Winstone Wallboards Web: www.gib.co.nz Telephone: 0800 100 442

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified GIB® systems, GIB® system components, GIB® plasterboard, associated GIB® products or GIB® accessories.

1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

GIB® plasterboard fixers and plasterers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with GIB® plasterboard lining systems installation and finishing techniques.  Submit evidence of experience on request.  For example:

� National Certificate of Interior Systems; or � Certified Business member of AWCINZ.

Performance

1.6 INSTALLER WORK SKILLS AND QUALIFICATIONS

Allow for inspection of the finished plasterboard surface: � before applying sealer and � before applying finish coatings or decorative papers,

so that after assessment of the type and/or angle of illumination and its effect on the completed decorative treatment, group approval and acceptance of the surface can be given.

1.7 INSPECTIONS AND ACCEPTANCE

Provide the GIB® Noise Control Systems.  Refer to SELECTIONS for system/STC.  Include for forming and treating of perimeters of openings and penetrations in the elements to ensure the specified performance.  Ensure absence of adjoining flanking paths.

1.8 SOUND INSULATION REQUIREMENTS

Provide braced wall systems using GIB® Ezybrace® Systems (June 2011) or GIB® Ezybrace® Software (2011) to meet the requirements of NZS 3604 when tested to BRANZ Technical Paper P21.  Alternatively use GIB® Ezybrace® for Steel Frame Housing (NASH) Software 2011 to meet the requirements of NASH Residential and Low-Rise Steel Framing Part 1 2010 Design Criteria.  Refer to drawings for location and type.

1.9 BRACING REQUIREMENTS

All GIB® unfinished plasterboard sheet materials achieve a Group Classification of, Group 1-S to NZBC C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.1, following testing in accordance with ISO 5660.1 and ISO 5660.2.

1.10 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES - UNFINISHED BOARD

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Gypsum plaster core encased in a face and backing paper formed for standard and water resistance use to AS/NZS 2588.  Refer to SELECTIONS for location, type, thickness and finish. GIB® Standard plasterboard GIB Braceline® & GIB® Noiseline® dual purpose wall bracing & noise control plasterboard GIB Aqualine® wet area plasterboard

2.1 GIB® PLASTERBOARD

GIB-Cove® plasterboard cornice.  Refer to SELECTIONS for profile and size.

Components

2.2 CORNICE

GIB® Rondo® metal ceiling battens, batten joiners and perimeter channel. 2.3 CEILING BATTENS

GIB® Grabber® drywall screws. 2.4 SCREWS

GIB® Nails (gold passivated). 2.5 NAILS

Size: 30mm, 40mm

GIB® Goldline™ tape-on trims 2.6 TAPE ON TRIMS AND EDGES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 83

Page 84: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

GIB® galvanized steel slim angle trims. 2.7 METAL ANGLE TRIMS

GIB® Rondo® P35 control joints. GIB® Goldline™ tape-on trims

Accessories

2.8 CONTROL JOINTS

Timber frame and/or steel frame: GIBFix® One ultra low VOC water based wallboard adhesive GIBFix® All-Bond solvent based wallboard adhesive

2.9 ADHESIVE

2.10 JOINTING COMPOUND

Bedding compound: GIB Tradeset®, GIB Lite Blue®, GIB MaxSet®, GIB ProMix® All Purpose, GIB Plus 4®

Finishing compound: GIB ProMix® All Purpose, GIB® Trade Finish®, GIB® Trade Finish® Lite, GIB ProMix® Lite, GIB® U-Mix, GIB Plus 4®, GIB Trade Finish® Multi

Cove: GIB-Cove® Bond

GIB® paper jointing tape. 2.11 JOINTING TAPE

GIB Soundseal® ultra low VOC water based highly flexible acoustic sealant. 2.12 ACOUSTIC SEALANT

GIB® Gap Filler ultra low VOC multi-purpose acrylic flexible filler 2.13 GAP FILLER

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Store GIB® plasterboard sheets and accessories in dry conditions stored indoors out of direct sunlight in neat flat stacks on either an impervious plastic sheet or clear of the floor with no sagging and avoiding damage to ends, edges and surfaces.  Reject damaged material.  Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).

3.1 STORAGE

Provide the selected plasterboard surfaces to the pre decorative levels of finish specified in AS/NZS 2589. 3.2 LEVELS OF PLASTERBOARD FINISH

Before commencing work, agree in writing upon the surface finish assessment procedure towards ensuring that the quality of finish expectations are reasonable and are subsequently obtained and acceptable.   Do not apply decorative treatment until it is agreed in writing by the contractor, subcontractors and decorator that the specified plasterboard Level of Finish has been achieved.   "Levels of plasterboard finish" is a tool for specifying the required quality of finish when installing and flush stopping GIB® plasterboard prior to the application of a range of decorative finishes under various lighting conditions.  Refer to AS/NZS 2589.

3.3 CONFIRM LEVELS OF PLASTERBOARD FINISH ACCEPTANCE

Do not commence work until the substrate is plumb, level and to the standard required by the sheet manufacturer's requirements.  Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).

3.4 SUBSTRATE

Maximum allowable moisture content to AS/NZS 2589 for timber framing at lining: 18% or less for plasterboard linings.  Refer to NZBC E2/AS1 and GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).

3.5 TIMBER FRAME MOISTURE CONTENT

Protect surfaces; cabinetwork, fittings, equipment and finishes already in place from the possibility of water staining and stopping damage.  Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).

Application

3.6 PROTECTION

Install to GIB® Rondo® Ceiling Batten Systems requirements. 3.7 INSTALL CEILING BATTENS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 84

Page 85: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Form to GIB® Site Guide (Jan 2010).  Ensure bulk insulation thickness shall not exceed that of the wall framing.

3.8 LINING WALLS AND CEILINGS GENERALLY

Minimise joints by careful sheet layout using the largest sheet sizes possible, and generally fixing horizontally.  Where part sheets are required for various stud heights they should be positioned so the cut sheet is as low as possible to keep joints below eye level.

3.9 BOARD ORIENTATION

Form to GIB® Noise Control Systems requirements. 3.10 FORM NOISE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Form to GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems requirements. 3.11 FORM WET AREA SYSTEMS

Form to GIB® Ezybrace® Systems (June 2011) requirements. 3.12 FORM BRACING SYSTEMS

Form control joints to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) requirements. 3.13 FORM CONTROL JOINTS

Install to GIB-Cove® literature using GIB-Cove® Bond. 3.14 INSTALL COVES

Install to GIB® Goldline™ Tape-on trims literature and/or GIB® Ultraflex high impact corner mould literature.

Finishing

3.15 INSTALL TAPE-ON TRIMS

To GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) and AS/NZS 2589.

Completion

3.16 FINISHING GENERALLY

Replace damaged sheets or elements. 3.17 REPLACE

Clean down completed surfaces to remove irregularities and finally sand down with fine paper to the sheet manufacturer's requirements, to leave completely smooth and clean.

3.18 CLEAN DOWN

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.19 REMOVE

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 LEAVE

Plasterboard

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 GIB® STANDARD SYSTEMS WALLS

Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements

Thickness Finish Level

Timber framed walls as noted on drawing 1535 GA.15

GIB® Standard plasterboard 13mm Level 4

       

4.2 GIB® WATER RESISTANT SYSTEMS WALLS

Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements

Thickness Finish Level

Timber framed walls as noted on drawing 1535 GA.15

GIB Aqualine® plasterboard 13mm Level 4

4.3 GIB® STANDARD SYSTEMS CEILINGS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 85

Page 86: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements

Thickness Finish Level

Ceiling systems as noted on drawing 1535 GA.18

GIB® Standard plasterboard 13mm Level 4

4.4 GIB® WATER RESISTANT SYSTEMS CEILINGS

Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements

Thickness Finish Level

Timber framed walls as noted on drawing 1535 GA.15

GIB Aqualine® plasterboard 13mm Level 4

Refer to GIB® Noise Control Systems 4.5 GIB® SOUND RATED SYSTEMS

Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements

STC / System specification

Finish Level

~ ~ ~ ~

Refer to GIB® Ezybrace® Systems.  For bracing element location refer to drawn documentation.

Accessories

4.6 GIB® BRACING SYSTEMS

4.7 GIB® RONDO® CEILING BATTENS

Brand/type: GIB® Rondo® Ceiling battens

4.8 GIB® TAPE ON EDGE OR CORNER TRIMS

Brand/type: GIB Goldline tape-on trims

4.9 GIB® EDGE PROFILES

Brand/type: Negative detail in flat ceiling areas - preformed steel folded strip

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 86

Page 87: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

5151 INTERNAL TRIM

  This section relates to simple lengths of trim fixed on site as of isolated internal members, with simple end joints. It includes:

� Timber skirtings � MDF facings

  Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 15, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and GD.20, 21, 22.  

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4521AC  APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors Refer to 5113G  GIB Plasterboard linings Refer to 5230  Interior doors

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 3610 Specification for profiles of mouldings and joinery

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Carters   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Performance

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Carter Holt Harvey Wood Products Ltd Web: www.chhproducts.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 326 759

For all Risk Groups covered by NZBC C/AS2-AS7. All trim to have the appropriate Group Number to match that of the wall or ceiling to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, table 4.1.  Except that, there is no requirement for trim that does not exceed 5% of the wall or ceiling area to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.6.d).

1.4 FIRE PROPERTIES

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

To NZS 3610 and to profiles detailed on the drawings.  Timber species, grade and treatment to NZS 3602. 2.1 TIMBER TRIM

Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

Components

2.2 MDF TRIM

Bright steel to dimension requirements of NZS 3604.  Use galvanized where prone to dampness. 2.3 NAILS

Bright steel of a length three times the thickness of the member being fixed.  Use cadmium plated where prone to dampness.

2.4 BRADS

2.5 SCREWS, STEEL

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5151 INTERNAL TRIM Page 87

Page 88: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Bright steel of a length to penetrate the substrate up to the shank.  Use stainless steel in wet areas.

Chrome plated of a length to penetrate the substrate up to the shank. 2.6 SCREWS, CHROME PLATED

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

To comply with NZS 3604, except as varied in this specification.  Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.1 GENERALLY

Take delivery of trims undamaged and unmarked and store on site under cover, away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight in adequately ventilated area and clear of areas where work is in progress, to ensure materials are of the required standard when fixed in place.

3.2 STORAGE

Remove materials from packaging, separate and allow to acclimatise in the proposed installation area for 48 hours minimum prior to installation.

3.3 ACCLIMATISE MATERIALS

Ensure that the substrate to trims will allow work of the required standard.  If it does not, do not proceed until the substrate has been remedied.

Application - Generally

3.4 ENSURE

Use full lengths.  Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and, mitred and returned at stop ends.  Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using nails or brads to suit.  Leave secure and with no movement possible.

Application - MDF trim

3.5 INSTALL TIMBER TRIM

Use full lengths.  Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and returned on itself at stop ends.  Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using 40mm or 50mm brads to suit, ensuring fixing to a minimum depth of 25mm into framing timber.  Leave secure and with no movement possible.  Punch brads and fill with stopping compound to maintain the smooth surface.

Finishing

3.6 NAIL FIX

Punch all nail heads below the face of trim ready to receive stopping, as specified under painting preparation.

Completion

3.7 PUNCH

Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish required for following procedures.

3.8 LEAVE

Protect the completed work and make good before any surface finish is applied. 3.9 PROTECTION

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.10 REPLACE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.11 REMOVE

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 INTERNAL TIMBER TRIM

Manufacturer: Carters Species/grade: Radiata pine / clears Finish: Paint    

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5151 INTERNAL TRIM Page 88

Page 89: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Member Reference Code reference Skirtings  

65 x 12 single bevel  

4.2 INTERNAL MDF TRIM

Manufacturer: Daiken Customwood New Zealand Ltd Finish Paint     Member Code or description Window facings 12mm x 60mm single bevel    

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5151 INTERNAL TRIM Page 89

Page 90: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

5230 INTERIOR DOORS

  This section relates to the supply and installation of hinged, cavity sliding and sliding interior doors.  it also includes 2 no. solid core external doors   Refer to drawing 1535 GA.70  Door Schedule and GA.12  Floor Plan References

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3610 Specification form profiles of mouldings and joinery

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Renall Doors Ltd   Copies of the above literature are available from ~

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Web: www.renalldoors.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 06 379 8066 Facsimile: 06 379 7079

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: CS for Doors   Copies of the above literature are available from ~

1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Web: www.csfordoors.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 276 0800 Mobile: 021 630 800

2 PRODUCTS

To NZS 3602. 2.1 TIMBER

Traditional profiles to NZS 3610.  Proprietary profiles and special profiles as detailed.  Pencil radius corners of profiled schedules for paint finish.

2.2 PROFILES, FACINGS, SCRIBERS AND ARCHITRAVES

Doors as scheduled complete with matching 6mm clashing strip to both sides and to the exposed edge of cavity slider doors.

2.3 DOORS, TIMBER VENEER

Doors as scheduled (without clashing strips). 2.4 DOORS, PAINTED

Doors hung within a proprietary cavity slider frame and complete with brand-matched sliding door gear. 2.5 CAVITY SLIDERS

Size and gauge to carry door.  3 hinges per door. 2.6 DOOR HINGES

To suit door/sash size and glazed weight and as detailed. 2.7 SLIDING DOOR GEAR

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE MEASURE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5230 INTERIOR DOORS Page 90

Page 91: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Confirm framed openings on site for dimension, plumb and straightness prior to fabrication or ordering of timber joinery.  Confirm lintel head and sill deflection for sliding or bi-fold door systems is within the manufacturer's specified tolerances.  Provide not less than 10mm unless otherwise required.

Manufacture to the methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.2 EXECUTION GENERALLY

Factory fit the following where specified: - � Hinges

3.3 FACTORY FIT HARDWARE

Before delivery to site: - � Brace square and provide protection to assemblies during delivery to site.  Where factory glazed,

indicate the presence of transparent glasses with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type.

Internal doors

3.4 FACTORY FINISHING

Fabricate as detailed.  Wedge and rigidly fix in place without distortion, plumb, and true to line and face.  Pre drill for fixings through frame.  Countersink and plug frames scheduled for clear finish.

3.5 INTERNAL JOINERY FRAMES

Heads and jambs finished minimum 18mm, with 10mm planted door stops.  Width to match width of lined walls.  Hang doors on hinges, sliding, or sliding-folding gear to the door manufacturer's requirements and to operate freely.  Countersink and plug frames scheduled for clear finish.  Fit hardware.

3.6 DOOR LINERS

Install in accordance with the door manufacturer's requirements, allowing for removal of top trim for maintenance.

Completion

3.7 CAVITY SLIDERS

Check and adjust operation of all sashes, doors, hardware and furniture. 3.8 CHECK

On completion remove any temporary protection and leave ready for following work. 3.9 TEMPORARY PROTECTION

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 SOLID CORE DOORS - EXTERNAL - ND.11, ND.13

Brand/type: Renall interior solid core doors Door facing: Timber Glazing: Timber beaded viewing panel Finish: Paint Glass: 5mm annealed Hardware: Refer to hardware schedule

4.2 CAVITY SLIDER DOORS - ND.04, ND.16

Brand/type: CS for Doors - SofStop cavity slider Door size: 810 x 1980 Finish: Paint Hardware: As supplied by door manufacturer

4.3 SOLID CORE DOORS - INTERNAL

Brand/type: Renall interior solid core doors Door facing: MDF Glazing: N/A Finish: Paint Glass: N/A Hardware: Refer to hardware schedule

4.4 SLIDING DOOR GEAR

Brand/type: Refer to the hardware schedule

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5230 INTERIOR DOORS Page 91

Page 92: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Accessories

Interior doors 4.5 DOOR HINGES

Type: Loose pin Size: 89mm Material: Zinc-plated steel Pin: Loose-pin zinc-plated steel

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5230 INTERIOR DOORS Page 92

Page 93: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS

  This section relates to the supply and installation of Forman Building Systems suspended tile ceiling systems, including;

� Suspension system � Ceiling tiles � Grid � Perimeter trim profile � All elements offered by the manufacturer to complete the system

  Refer to drawing 1535 GA.18  Reflected ceiling plan and GA.40 to 44 Cross Sections

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 4710P  Pink Batts and Pink Batts Silencer Insulation

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.   The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

FRR Fire resistance rating NRC Noise reduction coefficient CAC Ceiling attenuation class STC Sound transmission class

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire AS/NZS 1170.1 Structural design actions - Permanent, imposed and other actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1530.3 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures -

Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and smoke release

AS 1530.4 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures - Fire -resistance test of elements of construction

AS/NZS 2785 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation NZS 4219 Seismic performance of engineering systems in buildings AS 2946 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface

requirements for physical compatibility ASTM C423 Test method for sound absorption and sound absorption coefficients by

the reverberation room method ASTM E1414 Standard test method for airborne sound attenuation between rooms

sharing a common ceiling plenum (two room method)

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work:

    Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Requirements

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Armstrong: Including grid systems and accessories, 30 year warranty, installation, maintenance, safety data sheets, Green Star Assessment, Environmental Choice.

Company: Forman Building Systems Ltd Web: www.forman.co.nz/products.php Telephone: 0800 45 4000

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 93

Page 94: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Allow to erect a sample section of the suspended ceiling system offered.  Subject to confirmation in writing, the sample section may form part of the completed installation. Refer to SELECTIONS for location of sample section.

1.6 SAMPLE SECTION

To AS/NZS 2785. Installation by a manufacturer's accredited installer, using the manufacturer's technical services. Provide evidence of experience, listing completed projects of similar size and complexity. Installation of Firefly Cavity Barriers must be by trained installers.   Installation to comply with the loadings code AS/NZS 1170.1. Installation to comply with the requirements of NZS 4219; with related building services installations complying specifically with clauses 5.9 Ducting, 5.14 Luminaires and 5.13 Ceiling-suspended equipment and equipment in ceiling voids.

1.7 INSTALLATION

Supply information on the materials and method of cleaning the ceiling system over its expected life. 1.8 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Provide spare matching ceiling elements in the quantities specified in SELECTIONS.  Deliver into a dry store at the site or elsewhere as directed and at agreed times.

Performance

1.9 SPARES

Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1170.1 or NZS 1170.5. 1.10 LOADING CODE REQUIREMENT

Provide: � certification of compliance with NZS 1170.5, section 8 for evaluation � certificates and other evidence that the system offered complies with the standards of performance

specified � a Producer Statement on completion.

1.11 CERTIFICATION

Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.  Use an independent testing authority to test a specimen of the ceiling system to ASTM C423 and ASTM E1414, and submit the results for acceptance.

1.12 ACOUSTIC REQUIREMENTS

The Group Number Classification to NZBC C/AS2-C/AS6, table 4.1, has been determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A, following testing to ISO 5660.1.  

All other Forman ceiling tile products tested to AS/NZS 1530.3.  Refer to SELECTIONS for tested products.

1.13 FORMAN PRODUCT FIRE GROUP NUMBERS

Product Group Number Armstrong, Eurocoustic and Parafon ceiling tile range 1 - S

Design the ceiling system, including cavity fire and smoke barriers where required, so that together with the floor it is to NZBC C/AS1-C/AS7 when tested to AS 1530.4.  Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.

1.14 FIRE RATING REQUIREMENT

Design the ceiling system for use over its expected life without deterioration.  Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.

1.15 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. 1.16 REFLECTANCE

Materials - Armstrong two way exposed grid system

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ARMSTRONG PEAKFORM SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Grid finish/colour: Armstrong global white

2.2 PERIMETER TRIM - STEEL

Brand/form: Armstrong PeakForm perimeter trim by Forman Building Systems Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel Finish/colour: Armstrong global white Wall angle trim: Shadowline wall angle trim

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 94

Page 95: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Supplied by Forman Building Systems.

Components

2.3 CEILING TILES

25mm x 6 gauge non-rusting Type S self-drilling and self-tapping buglehead screws. 2.4 SCREWS

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Co-ordinate and co-operate with electrical and mechanical work to avoid conflict between suspension members and luminaires, diffusers, pipework and ducting. Confirm the provision of extra hangers and fixings.   Ensure co-operation with work in and above the ceiling, including the marking of specific ceiling tiles below major access points to above-ceiling services. Colour coded markings to follow the standards laid down by mechanical and electrical services.

3.1 CO-ORDINATE SERVICES

Do not begin installation until the building is closed in, fully glazed, the roof watertight, and mechanical and electrical duct work above the ceiling completed.

3.2 SITE CONDITIONS

Comply with AS 2946 for interface requirements for physical compatibility. 3.3 COMPLY

Ensure that conditions are suitable for the ceiling installation.  Arrange for the programming of the work to suit required practice.

Application

3.4 RESPONSIBILITY

Install the system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum standards and the ceiling manufacturer's requirements. 3.5 INSTALL

Provide access to the ceiling system and the in-ceiling and above-ceiling services so that maintenance and removal of any part can be carried out without damage to the ceiling system or panels.

3.6 ACCESSIBILITY

Accommodate recessed light fittings, air conditioning outlets and other electrical and/or mechanical services that are fixed to or pass through the ceiling system.  Provide independent support for these as necessary.

3.7 PENETRATIONS

Protect adjacent existing work from damage during the installation.

Completion

3.8 PROTECT EXISTING WORK

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.9 REPLACE

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.10 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused elements and elements from the site. 3.11 REMOVE

Clean soiled or marked units. 3.12 CLEAN

For further details on selections go to www.forman.co.nz/products.php Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 SPARES

Packs: Allow for 2% of the ceiling tile quantity as spares

4.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 95

Page 96: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Acoustic

 

Grid and tile system

NRC: 0.70 minimum Attenuation Class: 30 minimum room to room

4.3 ARMSTRONG PEAKFORM SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Module size: 1200mm x 600mm Face dimension: 24mm Perimeter: Shadowline wall angle

4.4 CEILING TILES

Brand: Armstrong Type: Square Edge Pattern: Dune Max Thickness: 20mm Size: 1200mm x 600mm to suit grid Edge profile: Square Edge

Rondo Panther access panels. 4.5 RONDO PANTHER ACCESS PANEL

FRR: 30 mins Acoustic rating: STC 30 Finish/colour: White Size: 600mm x 600mm Edge: Standard Lock: Budget lock

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 96

Page 97: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS

  This section relates to the supply and installation of Forman Building Systems suspended sheet or flush ceiling systems, comprising of:

� Rondo furring channel system, supporting screw fixed sheet materials, � all elements offered by the manufacturer to complete the system.

  The ceiling linings are perforated corrugated steel sheet and are located above the new reception area.  Refer to drawing 1535 GA.18, GA.40 to 44 and GD.20 to 22

1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS

FRR Fire resistance rating NRC Noise reduction coefficient CAC Ceiling attenuation class

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.3 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire AS/NZS 1170.1 Structural design actions - Permanent, imposed and other actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1530.3 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures -

Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and smoke release

AS 1530.4 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures - Fire -resistance test of elements of construction

AS/NZS 2785 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation NZS 4219 Seismic performance of engineering systems in buildings AS 2946 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface

requirements for physical compatibility ASTM E1414 Standard test method for airborne sound attenuation between rooms

sharing a common ceiling plenum (two room method)

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are:  

  Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Requirements

1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Rondo: Concealed Suspended Ceiling Systems      

Company: Forman Building Systems Ltd Web: www.forman.co.nz/products.php Telephone: 0800 45 4000

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Allow to erect a sample section of the suspended ceiling system offered.  Subject to confirmation in writing, the sample section may form part of the completed installation. Refer to SELECTIONS for location of sample section.

1.6 SAMPLE SECTION

1.7 INSTALLATION

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS Page 97

Page 98: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

To AS/NZS 2785. Installation by a manufacturer's accredited installer, using the manufacturer's technical services. Provide evidence of experience, listing completed projects of similar size and complexity. Installation of Firefly Cavity Barriers must be by trained installers.   Installation to comply with the loadings code AS/NZS 1170.1. Installation to comply with the requirements of NZS 4219; with related building services installations complying specifically with clauses 5.9 Ducting, 5.14 Luminaires, and 5.13 Ceiling-suspended equipment and equipment in ceiling voids.

Supply information on the materials and method of cleaning the ceiling system over its expected life. 1.8 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Provide spare matching ceiling elements in the quantities specified in SELECTIONS.  Deliver into a dry store at the site or elsewhere as directed and at agreed times.

Performance

1.9 SPARES

Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1170.1 or NZS 1170.5. 1.10 LOADING CODE REQUIREMENT

� certification of compliance with NZS 1170.5, section 8 for evaluation � certificates and other evidence that the system offered complies with the standards of performance

specified � a Producer Statement on completion.

1.11 CERTIFICATION

The Group Number Classification to NZBC C/AS2-C/AS6, table 4.1, has been determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A, following testing to ISO 5660.1.  

All other Forman ceiling tile products tested to AS/NZS 1530.3. Refer to SELECTIONS for tested products.

1.12 FORMAN PRODUCT FIRE GROUP NUMBERS

Product Group Number Armstrong, Eurocoustic and Parafon ceiling tile range 1 - S

Design the ceiling system for use over its expected life without deterioration.  Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.

1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. 1.14 REFLECTANCE

Materials - Rondo Key-Lock suspended flush ceilings

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM

System: Rondo Key-Lock building board suspension system   Supplied by Forman Building Systems   Freephone: 0800 45 4000.

GIB® plasterboard to AS/NZS 2588. 2.2 PLASTERBOARD SHEET

Components

2.3 PERFORATED CORRUGATED STEEL SHEETING

Join furring channels and C channels using pop rivets or 8g-16 x 12mm (minimum) self drilling wafer head screws.

2.4 FASTENERS SUSPENSION SYSTEM

25mm x 6 gauge non-rusting Type S self-drilling and self-tapping buglehead screws. 2.5 SCREWS

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

3.1 CO-ORDINATE SERVICES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS Page 98

Page 99: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Co-ordinate and co-operate with electrical and mechanical work to avoid conflict between suspension members and luminaires, diffusers, pipework and ducting. Confirm the provision of extra hangers and fixings.   Ensure co-operation with work in and above the ceiling, including the marking of specific ceiling tiles below major access points to above-ceiling services. Colour coded markings to follow the standards laid down by mechanical and electrical services.

Do not begin installation until the building is closed in, fully glazed, the roof watertight, and mechanical and electrical duct work above the ceiling completed.

3.2 SITE CONDITIONS

Comply with AS 2946 for interface requirements for physical compatibility. 3.3 COMPLY

Ensure that conditions are suitable for the ceiling installation.  Arrange for the programming of the work to suit required practice.

Application

3.4 RESPONSIBILITY

Install the system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum standards and the ceiling manufacturer's requirements. 3.5 INSTALL

Provide access to the ceiling system and the in-ceiling and above-ceiling services so that maintenance and removal of any part can be carried out without damage to the ceiling system or panels.

3.6 ACCESSIBILITY

Accommodate recessed light fittings, air conditioning outlets and other electrical and/or mechanical services that are fixed to or pass through the ceiling system.  Provide independent support for these as necessary.

3.7 PENETRATIONS

Install the Forman Rondo Keylock suspension system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum standards.  Screw-fix sheets to furring channel sections at the centres required by the ceiling lining manufacturer.  Stagger joints and fully support on sections, with strongbacks at centres to suit the load and Rondo installation manual.  Refer to 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS for plasterboard stopping specification.

3.8 CEILING LINING - FIXING

Protect adjacent existing work from damage during the installation.

Completion

3.9 PROTECT EXISTING WORK

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.10 REPLACE

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.11 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused elements and elements from the site. 3.12 REMOVE

Clean soiled or marked units. 3.13 CLEAN

For further details on selections go to www.forman.co.nz/products.php Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4 SELECTIONS

Acoustic

 

Grid and tile system

4.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

NRC: 0.6 minimum

Rondo Key-Lock building board suspension system from Forman Building Systems. 4.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Location: Main reception space Ceiling lining: Perforated corrugated steel sheet - 0.55mm BMT

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS Page 99

Page 100: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY

  This section relates to the supply and installation of custom joinery fittings and cabinetwork, purpose made in a factory and fitted on site, incorporating Laminex New Zealand® range of cabinetry panel products. It includes:

� Trade Essentials® Range - Plywood, Superfine®, Lakepine, Whiteboard, Hardboard, Tempered Hardboard, Cabinet Backing, Strandboard

� Melteca® and Melteca® Hi-Gloss Panels � Associated components and accessories necessary to complete the cabinetry installation.

  The scope includes the main joinery unit in the reception area, the joinery unit behind the reception counter, the joinery unit in the staff room, one in each non-accessible w.c. and one in the shower room.

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops for associated proprietary bench tops Refer to 7151  Sanitary fixtures, tapware and accessories

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORKS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC C/VM2 Protection from fire AS/NZS 1859.1 Reconstituted wood based panels - Specifications - Particleboard  

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Trade Essentials® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets Melteca® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guide Formica® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guide Laminex® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guide Melteca®, Formica®, Laminex® and Trade Essentials® Fire Test Reports   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Company: Laminex New Zealand, a division of Fletcher Building Ltd Web: www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 303 606

Provide a Laminex New Zealand material warranty:

Refer to Laminex New Zealand for warranty details and conditions.  

� Provide this warranty on Laminex New Zealand standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

7 years For Melteca® and Melteca® Purecoat® panel products Limited Warranty 7 years For Formica® Laminates Limited Warranty 7 years For Laminex® Laminates Limited Warranty

Provide an installer warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the installer standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

2 years For installation

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 100

Page 101: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Requirements

Installers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified.  If requested provide evidence of qualification / experience prior to commencing work.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Laminex New Zealand components and associated products listed in this section.

1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for details of how samples will be reviewed.   Provide the following samples for review by the Contract Administrator: ~

1.8 SAMPLES

Provide maintenance materials listed in SELECTIONS to the Principal for ongoing maintenance requirements.

Performance

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

Laminex New Zealand cabinetry materials tested to ISO 5660.1 and which achieve a Group Number Classification of 3 to NZBC C/AS2-AS6, table 4.1, as determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A, are as follows:

� Melteca® and Melteca® Hi-Gloss Panels

1.10 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES

Materials - plywood

2 PRODUCTS

Trade Essentials® B/B Lite Poplar Plywood, supplied in size 2400mm x 1200mm x 18mm thick. Lightweight and suitable for CNC panels, as a substrate for laminating with HPL and for lightweight cabinetry.  Refer to SELECTIONS.

Materials - particleboard

2.1 TRADE ESSENTIALS PLYWOOD - BB LITE

Trade Essentials® Superfine®, a medium density, grain less, resin bonded particleboard panel, used as substrate for laminates, vinyl overlays, low pressure melamine overlays, wood veneers and paint finishes.  Manufactured to AS/NZS 1859.1, 18mm thick panel tested to ISO 5660.1.  For dry interior use only.  Supplied in various panel sizes and thicknesses.  Refer to SELECTIONS.

Materials - MDF panels

2.2 TRADE ESSENTIALS SUPERFINE PARTICLEBOARD - SUBSTRATE IN MELTECA PANELS

Melteca® Quality Laminated Panels comprised of a Superfine® particleboard substrate with a double-faced melamine surface.  Manufactured to AS/NZS 1859.3 and tested to ISO 5660.1.  Available in a selection of sheet sizes and thicknesses in a variety of decors and finishes, each with matching edgetape.  Fire retardant options also available.  Refer to SELECTIONS.

Components

2.3 MELTECA QUALITY LAMINATED PANELS

Refer to 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS section. 2.4 BENCHTOPS

One-piece steel, straight deep-cut thread, fibre board screws with press fit plastic trim cap. 2.5 CARCASE CONNECTORS

Knock down type centric sphere zinc alloy connectors with connecting bolts, sleeves and dowels, to suit each particular fastening location.

2.6 CARCASE FASTENERS

Butt, broad butt, flush butt or overlay steel or brass, to suit the location, or as detailed. 2.7 BUTT HINGES

All-metal zinc alloy with automatic spring and screw-fixed.  Door stops of plastic foam with self adhesive backs, or plastic buttons clear or coloured to match unit.

2.8 CONCEALED HINGES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 101

Page 102: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

All-metal, flush-fitted and screw-fixed with no gap when the flap is down. 2.9 FLAP HINGES

Under mounted type, precision running ball-mounted full extension, bright steel finish system.

Accessories

2.10 DRAWER RUNNERS

As approved by the manufacturer for the cabinetry product or pre-finished cabinetry product joint being used. 2.11 ADHESIVES

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the current syllabus for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).  Take responsibility for the completed joinery fixtures including fittings included within fixtures and the on-site installation.

3.1 JOINERY FIXTURES GENERALLY

Site check and confirm dimensions after wall linings have been fixed.  Verify positions of electric power outlets, wiring to light fittings included in joinery fixtures, water supplies and waste pipe locations.

3.2 SITE MEASURE

Arrange jointing and fixing so that shrinkage in any part and direction does not impair the strength or appearance of the finished work or damage the adjoining work.

3.3 SHRINKAGE

Provide reasonable tolerances at connections between the joinery fittings and the building fabric so that any irregularities are adequately compensated for in the site fixing.

3.4 TOLERANCES

Select and match all adjacent pieces.  Clash exposed edges of panels with matching edge tapes and finishes.

Conditions - site

3.5 LAMINEX PANEL PRODUCTS

Load, transport and unload fittings without distortion or damage and keep covered to protect from the weather.

3.6 TRANSIT

Deliver fittings to the site only when floor, wall and ceiling surfaces are in place and the fittings can be immediately placed in their final location.

Assembly

3.7 DELIVERY

Carry out machining within the practices required for the particular Laminex New Zealand panel product being used.  Machine drill holes, cut recesses and form joints ready for assembly to the componentry manufacturer's requirements.  Ensure work is accurate, square and true to line.

3.8 MACHINING

Obtain fitting templates from the appliances and other fittings to be installed within cabinetry and bench tops.  Ensure appliances and fittings can be installed with the required tolerances and clearances.  Where bench tops are being provided under 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS, provide templates and confirm dimensions to others.

3.9 MAKE CUT OUTS FOR APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

Carry out gluing, dowelling, and other operations necessary for the proper assembly of the fittings as detailed with fixings concealed unless detailed otherwise.  Scribe fit adjustable shelves with 4 shelf pins to each and with force fit pin holes at 50mm maximum centres in solid cheeks.  Construct drawers and using groove mounting runners, fit them with 3mm clearance into drawer space.  Hang doors on concealed hinges with 115 degree openings except where detailed for 170 degrees.

3.10 ASSEMBLY

3.11 GLUE JOINTS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 102

Page 103: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Use glue joints where provision for shrinkage is not required.  Cross-tongue or otherwise reinforce.  Surfaces in contact to have an even sawn or planed finish and be free of contamination.  Mix, apply and set to the glue manufacturer's requirements with adequate pressure applied to ensure intimate contact that will be maintained while the glue sets.

Locate and drive connectors to Laminex New Zealand requirements.  Fit plastic trim cap where detailed.  Conceal or hide from sight other connector heads.

3.12 CONNECTOR JOINTS

Locate and drive connecting bolts to Laminex New Zealand requirements.  Form joint and fit and rotate centric sphere connector to finish it rigid and tightly fitting over the whole length of the joint.

Application

3.13 FASTENER JOINTS

� Scribe fit and conceal fix rigidly in place square, level, plumb and true to line and face as detailed and to the required standard.

� Assemble fittings on-site if brought in sections. � Fit counter and bench tops and upstands. � Complete with moveable parts in place and freely moving in their proper range.

3.14 FIXING ON SITE

Protect finished surfaces from damage, particularly bench tops.

Care & maintenance - cabinetry surfaces

3.15 PROTECT

Provide maintenance documentation in accordance with Laminex New Zealand Care & Maintenance Guides as necessary for the Principal to maintain the works.  Provide documentation no later than the date of practical completion or the date on which the Principal takes occupation of the works.

Completion

3.16 CARE & MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

3.17 ROUTINE CLEANING

Repair damaged or marked elements.  Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable.  Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.18 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.19 REPLACE

Leave work complete, clean and without blemish and to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.21 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4 SELECTIONS

Materials - MDF panels

4.1 CABINET BACKING

Location: Backing panels for each joinery unit Manufacturer: Fletcher Wood Panels Ltd Grade/brand: Panelwhite Thickness: 6mm Sheet size: 2440mm x 1220mm    

4.2 MELTECA QUALITY LAMINATED PANELS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 103

Page 104: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Components

Location: All joinery units Supplier: Laminex New Zealand Grade/brand: Melteca® Quality Laminated Panels Thickness: 16mm, refer to Melteca® Availability Guide Panel size: various, refer to Melteca® Availability Guide Substrate: Superfine® Particleboard Finish: Satin Colours: To be selected Clashing: 2mm pvc edging strips

Refer to 511LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS section. 4.3 BENCHTOPS

4.4 CARCASE CONNECTORS

Manufacturer: Hafele Finish: Bright steel    

4.5 CONCEALED HINGES

Manufacturer: Hafele Product name: Intermat

4.6 DRAWER RUNNERS

Manufacturer: Hettich International Product name: Quadro V6 Silent System

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 104

Page 105: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS

  This section relates to the supply and installation of prefabricated bench tops incorporating the Laminex New Zealand range of surface finishes and materials. It includes:

� Formica® HPL � Laminex® HPL

  The scope includes benchtops for the reception counter in the reception area, the unit behind the reception counter, the kitchen unit in the staff room, the vanity tops in the w.c's and the vanity top in the shower room

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 5511LC Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry for associated cabinetry work Refer to 7151  Sanitary fixtures, tapware and accessories

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC C/VM2 Protection from fire AS/NZS 2924.1 High pressure decorative laminates - Sheets made from thermosetting

resins - Classification and specifications EN 438.4 High-pressure decorative laminates (hpl) - sheets based on thermosetting

resins (usually called laminates) - part 4: Classification and specifications for compact laminates of thickness 2mm and greater

ISO 5660.1 Reaction to Fire Tests - Heat Release Smoke Production and Mass Loss Rate Part 1: Heat Release Rate (Cone Calorimeter Method)

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Formica® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guides Laminex® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets. Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guides   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Laminex New Zealand Ltd, a division of Fletcher Building Ltd Web: www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 303 606

Provide a Laminex New Zealand material warranty:

Refer to Laminex New Zealand for warranty details and conditions.  

� Provide material warranty in accordance with Laminex New Zealand Ltd requirements � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

7 years For Formica® Laminates Limited Warranty 7 years For Laminex® Laminates  

Provide an installer warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the installer standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

2 years For installation

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 105

Page 106: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Requirements

Fabricator/Installer to be experienced in the installation of Formica®, Laminex® or Caesarstone® bench tops. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Laminex New Zealand components and associated products listed in this section.

1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Provide maintenance documentation in accordance with Laminex New Zealand Care & Maintenance Guides as necessary for the Principal to maintain the works.  Provide documentation no later than the date of practical completion or the date on which the Principal takes occupation of the works.

Performance

1.8 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Laminex New Zealand bench top materials tested to ISO 5660.1 and achieve a Group Number Classification of 3 to NZBC C/AS2-AS6, table 4.1, as determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A.  Materials are as follows:

� Formica® HPL on Lakepine MDF � Laminex® HPL on Lakepine MDF

1.9 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Formica® HPL, a durable, post formable high pressure decorative laminate 0.7mm thick bonded to Lakepine MDF substrate.  Manufactured to AS/NZS 2924.1 and tested to ISO 5660.1.  Internal or external curves formed to a minimum radius of 10mm for solid colours and 6mm for patterns and wood grains in the machine direction.  Supplied in a range of sheet sizes, finishes and colours.  Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

2.1 FORMICA HPL BENCHTOP

Laminex® HPL, a durable post formable laminate 0.7mm thick bonded to Lakepine MDF substrate.  Manufactured to AS/NZS 2924.1 and tested to ISO 5660.1.  Internal or external curves formed to a minimum radius of 10mm for solid colours and 6mm for stones, abstract patterns and wood grains in the machine direction.  Supplied in a range of sheet size and colours.  Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

2.2 LAMINEX HPL BENCHTOP

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Keep products dry in transit.  Take delivery of products dry and undamaged.  Deliver all materials in original unopened packaging with labels intact.

3.1 DELIVERY

Store bench tops in a dry and securely locked area.  Provide supervision when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed.  Sign off each package from the schedule as released.

Pre-Installation

3.2 STORAGE

Ensure all room/areas are completely decorated. 3.3 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Site check and confirm dimensions after wall linings have been fixed.  Verify positions of electric power outlets, wiring to light fittings included in joinery fixtures, water supplies and waste pipe locations.

3.4 SITE MEASURE

Ensure substrate and fixings will allow work of the specified standard.  Ensure finishes are complete. 3.5 SUBSTRATE

Confirm fixing points needed for each bench top and confirm that the appropriate continuous support frame /cabinetry, nogging or lining at each fixing point location are provided.

3.6 SUPPORT

Do not proceed if support frame /cabinetry or services do not match the requirements of the bench top. 3.7 CO-ORDINATION

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 106

Page 107: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Check all components are included.  Assemble to Laminex New Zealand instructions and to achieve finished bench top.

Installation

3.8 ASSEMBLY

Locate bench top at heights and/or locations shown on the drawings.  Before proceeding, confirm any dimension not shown or known.

3.9 LOCATE

Carry out machining within the practices required for the bench top.  Machine drill and cut holes and recesses and form joints to the componentry manufacturer's requirements.  Ensure work is accurate, square and true to line and face.

3.10 FABRICATION QUALITY

Obtain fitting templates from the appliances and other fittings to be installed within the bench top.  Ensure appliances and fittings can be installed with the required tolerances and clearances.

3.11 MAKE CUT OUTS FOR APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS

Install each bench top in accordance with Laminex New Zealand requirements using templates and tools supplied or recommended by the manufacturer.  Set bench tops level, plumb and true to line and required location.

Completion

3.12 INSTALL

Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

3.13 ROUTINE CLEANING

Repair damaged or marked elements.  Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable.  Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.14 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK

Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish required for following work.

3.15 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.16 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Materials

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 FORMICA HPL BENCHTOP

Location: All joinery units Supplier: Laminex New Zealand Brand/type: Formica® HPL Sheet size: Maximum sheet size depending on unit Sheet thickness: 0.7mm Benchtop size: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Benchtop profile: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Solid colour: To be selected Finish: To be selected

4.2 LAMINEX HPL BENCHTOP

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 107

Page 108: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Location: All joinery units Supplier: Laminex New Zealand Brand/type: Laminex® HPL Sheet size: Maximum sheet size depending on unit Sheet thickness: 0.7mm Benchtop size: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Benchtop profile: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Solid colour: To be selected Finish: To be selected

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 108

Page 109: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING

  This section relates to the supply and installation of Jacobsen vinyl surfacing complete with skirtings, nosings, trims and edgings and including static control sheet to floors. It includes:

� PVC sheet   The scope includes anti-static vinyl in the New IT room,  floor vinyl in the w.c's,  slip resistant vinyl in the shower room,  and a vinyl area around the sink unit in the staff room.  Refer to drawing 1535 GA.14 for areas required and drawing 1535 GD.50 for base upstands.

Related work

1 GENERAL

Refer to 5511LC  Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry for base upstands

Documents

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS2-AS7 Protection from fire NZS/AS 1884 Floor coverings - Resilient sheet and tiles - Installation practices AS/NZS 3661.1   Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Requirements IEC 61340.4.1 Electrostatics - Part 4.1: Standard test methods for specific applications -

Electrical resistance of floor coverings and installed floors EN 1081 Resilient Floor Coverings - Determination of the Electrical Resistance BRANZ BU 330 Thin flooring materials - 2 Preparation and laying

Manufacturer's and Jacobsen Ltd documents relating to this part of the work: Jacobsen Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Warranties

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Jacobsen Web: www.jacobsens.co.nz Telephone: 0-9-574 0640 Auckland   0-4-495 4300 Wellington   0-3-366 4153 Christchurch

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

5 years: Materials

Provide an installer/applicator warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

1 year: Execution

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.6 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 109

Page 110: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Layers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

Submit on request samples of sheet, tile and accessories offered sufficient to show the pattern and the range of colour finish.

Performance

1.8 SAMPLES

Slip resistance for vinyl to comply with NZBC acceptable solution D1/AS1, clause 2.0, Level access routes and clause 3.0, Ramps.

� Sheet and tiles when in place on a level access route to have a mean coefficient of friction (µ) not less than 0.4 when tested wet in accordance with AS/NZS 3661.1.

� Sheet and tiles when in place on a sloping access route to have a coefficient of friction (µ) not less than µ = 0.4 + 0.0125S, where S is the slope of the walking surface expressed as a percentage.

  Provide evidence that the vinyl complies with the standard of performance specified.

1.9 SLIP RESISTANCE

Provide certificates and any other evidence at the time of selection/supply that the vinyl complies with NZBC verification method D1/VM1 and acceptable solution D1/AS1.

1.10 CERTIFY SLIP RESISTANCE

Test static control flooring to IEC 61340.4.1 or EN 1081 and provide a certificate of compliance. 1.11 TEST STATIC CONTROL

Flooring to meet the fire performance requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.3, by: Either, Flooring is tested and achieved the minimum Critical Radiant Flux requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.2.  Provide certificates or other evidence that the flooring will comply. or, Critical Radiant Flux not required if area of non-conforming products have an aggregate surface area of not greater than 5m² within a firecell, to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.6.a.

1.12 SURFACE FIRE PERFORMANCE

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Tarkett, with factory applied PUR (polyurethane) to ensure a low maintenance system requiring no sealers or polish.

2.1 VINYL SHEET

Form coving using either pencil cove or fillet cove method. 2.2 COVINGS

High vinyl content monolayer flexible PVC sheet static control flooring to IEC 61340.4.1 or EN 1081 complete with 12mm x 0.1mm copper foil strip.

2.3 VINYL SHEET, STATIC CONTROL

Cove based skirting.  Refer to SELECTIONS for height and colour. 2.4 VINYL SKIRTING

Jacobsen Tredsafe's aluminium finishing trims and transition bars. 2.5 FINISHING TRIM & TRANSITION BARS

Jacobsen PVC top cap to top of coved vinyl.

Accessories

2.6 COVE CAPPING

UZIN KE2000S or Jacobsen ProBond acrylic floor and wall adhesive. 2.7 ADHESIVE

To the adhesive manufacturer's requirements for the particular substrate. 2.8 PRIMER AND SEALER

Roberts floor levelling compound. 2.9 FLOOR LEVELLING COMPOUND

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 110

Page 111: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Manufacturer supplied colour matched weld rod using the Tarkett weld nozzle. 2.10 THERMOWELDING

Chemical weld heterogeneous vinyl to manufacturer's instructions.  Obtain a copy of instructions and follow specified procedures.

2.11 CHEMICAL WELDING

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

To manufacturer's requirements and NZS/AS 1884. 3.1 GENERALLY

Accept rolls of sheet, packages of tiles and accessories undamaged and dry.  Store rolls upright with other material on level surfaces in non-traffic, non-work areas that are enclosed, clean and dry.

3.2 STORAGE

Avoid distortion, stretching, marking and damage to edges while shifting unrolling and handling sheet, tiles and accessories.  Do not use damaged material.

3.3 HANDLING

Check that each colour supplied is from the same batch.  Follow the vinyl manufacturer's requirements for preparatory conditioning of rolls and working temperatures and conditions before, during and after laying the selected vinyl.  Protect work from solar heat gain and switch off under-floor heating during and for 48 hours either side of the work period.

3.4 PREPARATION

Do not start work before the building is enclosed, wet work is complete, doors are hung and lockable, finishes and trim complete and good lighting is available.

3.5 DO NOT START

Inspect the substrate to ensure it is a suitable finish 3.6 INSPECT

Protect adjoining work surfaces and finishes during the vinyl installation. 3.7 PROTECTION

Carry out the whole of this work to NZS/AS 1884, BRANZ BU 330 and the flooring manufacturer's requirements.

3.8 LAYING GENERALLY

Before beginning the installation confirm the proposed layout of material, location of seams and other visual considerations of the finished work.

Application - substrate preparation

3.9 TECHNIQUE

Clear substrate of debris, clean off surface contamination and carry out surface repairs using Roberts levelling compound.  Carefully feather out at perimeters of repaired areas.  Grind level, then vacuum to remove dust.  Check moisture content to NZS/AS 1884, Appendix A and do not commence laying vinyl until readings for the whole area show 75% relative humidity or less.

3.10 PREPARING NEW CONCRETE

Prime and/or seal porous plaster, concrete and timber substrates to the adhesive manufacturer's requirements.

Application - laying floors

3.11 APPLYING PRIMER OR SEALER FOR VINYL SHEET

Apply UZIN KE2000S at the required spread rate, without leaving trowel marks after setting.  Follow requirements for open time, taking note of the substrate porosity, ambient temperature and relative humidity.  Remove excess adhesive as the work proceeds using required techniques.

3.12 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVE

Roll out, cut, leave to condition and install sheet vinyl to Tarkett's recommended installation procedure, ensuring there are no air bubbles or twisting, the seams are kept clear of adhesive and immediately the sheet is adhered it is rolled with a 68 kg roller.

3.13 LAYING FLOOR SHEET

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 111

Page 112: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Machine groove and thermoweld seams in designated areas, using the Tarkett weld nozzle, heating the sheet and weld rod to a sufficient temperature to melt and fuse them together in a single mass.  Trim the weld to leave a smooth, flush surface with the sheet.

3.14 THERMOWELDING

Plan and allow cuts to avoid cross joins.  Obtain written approval before proceeding if cross joins are unavoidable.  Cross joins are not acceptable in wet areas.

3.15 CROSS JOINS

Pencil cove flooring to the specified height and finish off as detailed. 3.16 COVING VINYL

Perform butterfly method to internal and external mitres, allowing to thermoweld mitres. 3.17 COMPLETE MITRES

Lay out and adhere to the substrate to Tarkett's required installation procedures.  Roll out, cut, leave to condition and install static control sheet with approved adhesive, ensuring there are no air bubbles or twisting and the seams are kept clear of adhesives.  Immediately the sheet is adhered, roll with a 68 kg roller. Tarkett Granit SD should give average resistance readings of 1 x 106 to 1 x 108 ohms.

3.18 LAYING STATIC CONTROL SHEET

Hand groove and thermo-weld seams, heating the sheet and weld rod using Tarkett Speed Tip Nozzle to a sufficient temperature to melt and fuse them together in a single mass.  Trim the weld to leave a smooth, flush surface with the sheet.

Application - general

3.19 THERMOWELDING WALL VINYL

Fit skirtings in accordance with Tarkett's required installation procedures. 3.20 FIT VINYL SKIRTINGS

Scribe fit, adhere or otherwise fix true to line and face to the sheet manufacturer's requirements for each particular location.

Completion

3.21 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.22 REPLACE

Obtain a copy of the Tarkett cleaning instructions and carry out initial clean to those instructions. 3.23 CLEAN COMMERCIAL VINYL FLOORING

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.24 REMOVE

Protect completed work from damage for the period between completion of laying and completion of the contract works, or until acceptance/sign-off by ~.

3.25 PROTECT

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.26 LEAVE

For further details on selections go to www.jacobsens.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 VINYL SHEET - W.C.'S

Product: Tarkett Optima Colour/number: To be advised Thickness: 2mm Seam welding: Thermowelded

4.2 VINYL SHEET - SHOWER ROOM

Product: Tarkett Granit Multisafe Colour/number: To be advised Thickness: 2mm Seam welding: Thermowelded

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 112

Page 113: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4.3 COVINGS

Height: 100mm Type: Continuous

4.4 JACOBSEN ADHESIVE

Adhesive: UZIN KE2000S

4.5 VINYL SHEET, STATIC CONTROL

Type: Tarkett Granit SD Colour/number: To be selected Conductive strips: UZIN self adhesive conductive copper foil strip Adhesive: UZIN KE200S

4.6 FLOOR LEVELLING COMPOUND

Type: Roberts floor levelling compound

4.7 FINISHING TRIM & TRANSITION BARS

Location: Where shown on drawing 1535 GA.14 Brand: Tredsafe Profile number: DT 030 Profile colour: Champagne    

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 113

Page 114: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

6512 CARPET TILES

  This section relates to the supply and installation of carpet tiles. It includes:

� nylon � wool fibre � polymer-backed

Documents

1 GENERAL

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.1 DOCUMENTS

NZBC C/AS2-AS7 Protection from fire AS/NZS 2455.1 Textile floor coverings - installation practice - General AS/NZS 2455.2 Textile floor coverings - installation practice - Carpet tiles

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Tandus Flooring   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Warranties

1.2 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Floorspace Ltd Web: www.floorspace.co.nz Email: 021 880 303 Telephone: 04 934 3267

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the manufacturer/supplier standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.3 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

1 year: For manufacture

Provide an installer/applicator warranty:

  � Provide this warranty on the installer/applicator standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

1.4 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

1 year: For installation

Provide full size sample tiles for each type and pattern, for approval of colour, design and quality. 1.5 SAMPLES

Carpet tile layers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Concrete slab is be cured and dried to a relative humidity of not exceeding 75% or until the moisture content does not exceed 5.5%, in accordance with AS/NZS 2455.1, refer to section 6192 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION.

1.7 MOISTURE CONTENT OF CONCRETE SLAB

Supply reserve carpet tiles, suitably packaged for delivery and storage.  Refer to SELECTIONS. 1.8 RESERVE MATERIAL

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6512 CARPET TILES Page 114

Page 115: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Performance

Flooring to meet the fire performance requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.3, by: Either, Flooring is tested and achieved the minimum Critical Radiant Flux requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.2.  Provide certificates or other evidence that the flooring will comply. or, Critical Radiant Flux not required if area of non-conforming products have an aggregate surface area of not greater than 5m² within a firecell, to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.6.a.

1.9 SURFACE FIRE PERFORMANCE

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Nylon/wool fibre fusion-bonded to a polymer, PVC or bitumen backing. 2.1 CARPET TILES

A pressure release adhesive.  Refer to SELECTIONS for brand. 2.2 ADHESIVE

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Before starting work inspect the substrate to ensure that it will allow work of the required standard and that fittings and fixtures, around which the carpet is to be scribed, are in place.

3.1 INSPECTION

Protect adjoining work surfaces and finishes during the carpet installation. 3.2 PROTECTION

Plan the general layout to: � to conform with any special pattern requirements as detailed � to maximise perimeter and cut module sizes and � subject to any specific design instructions, to ensure that tiles are laid parallel to the longest wall.

3.3 LAYOUT

3.4 TEMPERATURE

Floor temperature: Minimum 16°C. Concrete pH: No more than 10.0. Carpet tiles: Conditioned at 16°C for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation.

Keep carpet tiles dry.  Protect from damage.

Application - substrate preparation

3.5 HANDLE AND STORE

To be level, smooth, clean, cured and dry. Remove loose material and dust.  Refer to 6192 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION.

Application - carpet tile laying

3.6 PREPARING NEW CONCRETE FLOOR

Lay in accordance with AS/NZS 2455.1, AS/NZS 2455.2 and the carpet tile manufacturer's own installation instructions.

3.7 LAYING GENERALLY

Confirm mono or quarter turn following selection 3.8 LAYING DIRECTION

Cut tiles from the back, using the carpet tile manufacturer's required cutting technique.

Completion

3.9 CUTTING OF TILES

Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal all debris, unused and temporary materials and elements from the site.

3.10 ROUTINE CLEANING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6512 CARPET TILES Page 115

Page 116: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Repair damaged or marked elements.  Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable.  Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.11 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Materials

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 CARPET TILES

Location: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.14 Brand: Tandus C & A Type: To be confirmed Pattern/colour: ~ Face yarn: ~ Backing: ~ Pile weight: ~ g/m²

4.2 ADHESIVE

Brand: Giltedge Giltgrip 66 (Pressure sensitive, low in VOC adhesive) Type: Pressure release adhesive

4.3 RESERVE MATERIAL

Tile type Quantity As selected 2 boxes

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6512 CARPET TILES Page 116

Page 117: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL

  This section relates to the general matters related to Resene painting work.

1 GENERAL

Refer to 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.   The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc.

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section: Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992

1.3 DOCUMENTS

MPNZA Specification manual

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are:  

  Copies of the above literature are available from Resene

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual   (hard copy or at www.resene.co.nz) Resene Putting your safety first

Telephone: 0800 RESENE (0800 737 363)

Warrant this work under normal conditions of use against failure referring to the Resene Promise of Quality in the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual.

Requirements This painting specification is written based on information available at the time of writing.

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Resene coating system, or associated components and products.  Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.   If in the applicator's own expertise and judgement an amendment to this specification is required, or where a substrate preparation, or required painting system is not covered in this specification, this shall be brought to the attention of the contract administrator and any amendment agreed before work proceeds any further.

1.6 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Painters to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified and with the Resene coating systems and be members of the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc.   The applicator is to have the necessary skill, experience and equipment to undertake the work.  The applicator remains responsible for ensuring proper completion of the work.   Painters to be selected from the Resene Eco.Decorator programme. The Resene Eco.Decorator programme is designed to recognise a nationwide network of environmentally responsible, quality focussed painting contractors. Refer to www.resene.co.nz/ecodecorator.htm for a list of Eco.Decorators in your area.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

1.8 CONTROL SAMPLES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 117

Page 118: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Prepare samples of the finished work, including the specified preparation.  Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type.  Obtain approval in writing of the appearance before proceeding.  Use the Resene Architectural Sample Box as a basis of standard where appropriate.

Control reference: Check colours to Resene colour samples prior to application and keep the Resene colour samples on site as a control reference.  Colour matches are not permitted as they will differ in appearance, durability and performance to the original selected colour over the life of the coating.  Samples of Resene colours may be ordered online from https://secure.clearfield.com/resene/SelectChart.asp?productType=3 or by calling 0800 RESENE (737 363).  Use the Resene Architectural Sample Box as a basis of standard where appropriate.

1.9 COLOUR SAMPLES

Before any work commences painters should verify, with Architects or specifying authority, that their paint matches a previously supplied standard card or panel.  Differently coloured paints will vary in price, opacity and durability.  Resene normally only specify two coats of colour but with certain colours, such as yellows and oranges, three coats may be needed.  Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type.

1.10 PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCING

Refer to the general section 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE for provision of the following general operation and maintenance information as electronic PDF format documents: Maintenance guide for Resene paint finishes www.resene.co.nz/comn/services/maintenance.htm. Provide this information prior to practical completion.

1.11 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Prepare samples of the finished work including the specified preparation.  Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type.  Make arrangements for the supervision of the relevant stages.  Obtain written approval before proceeding.   Supervised control samples may, after written approval, be used for comparative testing of dry film thicknesses of the complete coating systems.

1.12 SUPERVISED CONTROL SAMPLES

Refer to and comply with the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 including the obligation to:  

� Eliminate hazards and if hazards cannot be eliminated or isolated, then minimise the hazards in this work by using the proper equipment and techniques as required by the MPNZA Painters hazard handbook and Resene Putting your safety first handbook.

� Supply protective clothing and equipment. � Inform the contractor as well as the employees and others on site of those hazards and put in place

procedures for dealing with emergencies.

1.13 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Obtain from Resene (phone 0800 RESENE, or www.resene.co.nz) the safety data sheet for each product used and comply with the required safety procedures.  Keep sheets on site.

Performance

1.14 SAFETY DATA SHEETS

Permit representatives of Resene to inspect the work in progress and to take samples of their products from site if requested.  Resene will take care when inspecting the work, but does not accept any responsibility for the proper completion of the work before or after such inspection.

1.15 RESENE INSPECTION

Inspection of the whole of the work at each of the stages set out in SELECTIONS may be made.  Agree on a programme that will facilitate such inspection, including notification when each part and stage of the work is ready for inspection.

1.16 INSPECTION OF THE WORK

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.   Use only Resene products (which are guaranteed for consistency and performance under AS/NZS ISO 9001 and APAS) prepared, mixed and applied as directed in the Resene One-Line Specifications and Product Data Manual.  This specification has been written using where practical and available both low/no VOC and Environmental Choice approved products.

2.1 MATERIALS GENERALLY

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 118

Page 119: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Darker colours in areas of high sun exposure place significant stress on the coating and substrate.  Resene 'CoolColour' technology reduces heat absorption of a wide range of colours.  Contact your local Resene Representative or visit www.resene.co.nz for more information or visit www.resene.co.nz/coolcolour.  View a list of Resene colours that can be made using Resene CoolColour technology at www.resene.co.nz/colourlibrary.

2.2 EXPOSED DARK COLOURS

Use only if and when expressly directed by Resene for their particular product in a particular application.  Always wear gloves when handling any solvents including turpentine as harmful chemicals may be absorbed into the body through the skin.

Accessories

2.3 THINNERS/ADDITIVES

Contact your local Resene ColorShop for a full range of accessories and usage advice. 2.4 ACCESSORIES

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

To conform to required trade practice, which shall be deemed to include those methods, practices and techniques contained in the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc. Specification manual.

3.1 EXECUTION

Where surfaces have been treated with preservatives or fire retardants, check with the treatment manufacturer that coating materials are compatible with the treatment and do not inhibit its performance.  If they are not compatible, obtain instructions before proceeding.

3.2 TREATED SURFACES

The descriptions of areas in schedules and elsewhere are of necessity simplified.  Coat ancillary exposed surfaces to match similar or adjacent materials or areas, except where a fair-faced natural finish is required or items are completely prefinished.  In cases of doubt obtain written instructions before proceeding.

3.3 ANCILLARY SURFACES

Do not paint hinges or hardware that cannot be removed.  Before commencing work carefully remove hardware, fixtures and fittings, set aside where they cannot be damaged or misplaced and replace on completion.  Refer to SELECTIONS for hardware, fixtures and fittings for removal.

3.4 HARDWARE

Supply, lay and fix dropsheets, coverings and masking necessary to protect adjoining, fixtures, fittings and spaces from paint drops, spots, spray and damage.

Application - preparatory work

3.5 PROTECTION

Refer to the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual for surface preparation sheets (or obtain them by phoning 0800 RESENE, or at www.resene.co.nz) listed in the materials systems schedule clauses.  Carry out the preparatory work required by them for each of the substrates.

3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION

Handle cautiously lead-based paint and asbestos, if present, as outlined in the preamble of the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual and the Putting your safety first brochure.

3.7 LEAD-BASED PAINT, ASBESTOS

Remove and/or repair sharp edges, cracks and holes if present, as outlined in the preamble of the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual.   Elastomeric sealants, if used, should not be painted.  The paint film will not match the flexibility of the sealant and may severely limit its effectiveness.

3.8 SHARP EDGES, CRACKS AND HOLES

If any substrate or surface, that even with the preparation work called for in this section, cannot be brought up to a standard that will allow painting or clear finishing of the required standard then do not proceed until remedial work is carried out.

3.9 REMEDIAL WORK

3.10 GAP FILLING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 119

Page 120: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Make good cracks, holes, indented and damaged surfaces.  Use suitable gap fillers to match the surface being prepared.  Any special priming requirements of the fillers must be satisfied.  Allow to dry or set before sanding back level with the surface.  Prime or seal timber before using putty.   Exterior and wet areas: Use only Portland cement base or water-insoluble organic base gap fillers.

Carry out this work under cover in a suitable environment with suitable lighting.  Store items, both before and after coating, in a clean, dry area protected from the weather and mechanical damage, properly stacked and spaced to allow air circulation and to prevent sticking.

3.11 OFF-SITE WORK

Pre-treat any cut surfaces of preservative treated timber before priming.  Ensure L.O.S.P.  treated joinery has dried sufficiently to lose solvent odour. Pre-treat bare timber with Resene TimberLock (see Data Sheet D48) to improve the durability of subsequent coats.   Liberally coat end grain, allow to soak in and then recoat.

3.12 PRIMING JOINERY

Where off-site coatings are specified they must be applied to surfaces including those concealed when incorporated into the building.

3.13 CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES

Apply primer to suit the coating system to surfaces which will be concealed when incorporated into the building.

3.14 CONCEALED METAL SURFACES

Prime or seal and paint bottom edges before hanging. 3.15 EXTERNAL DOORS

Stained, varnished, or painted joinery to have the first two coats, or the primer and one undercoat, applied to rebates and beads before glazing.

3.16 BEAD GLAZING

According to the putty manufacturer's instructions allow putty to set, then prime with Resene Wood Primer (see Data Sheet D40).  Fully protect the putty by completing the Resene coating system as soon as it is sufficiently firm.

Application - generally

3.17 PUTTY FRONTING

Comply with the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual data sheets and the additional requirements of this work section. Ensure large wall areas that require more than one container of paint per coat, have enough paint boxed (mixed) together to complete the final coat.  This will not apply if a single factory batch of paint, rather than shop tinted paint, is applied.

3.18 PAINTING GENERALLY

Although generally supplied ready-mixed, thoroughly mix paints.  Lift any settled pigment and ensure the paint is homogenous.

3.19 MIXING

Defer painting of exterior surfaces until weather conditions are favourable - warm dry days without frost or heavy dews.  Avoid painting in direct sunlight any surfaces that absorb heat excessively.  As far as possible apply paint in the temperature range 15°C to 25°C.  If temperatures fall outside the range of 10°C and 35°C do not paint unless paints with the necessary temperature tolerance have been specified.  Do not apply solvent borne paint if moisture is present on the surface.

3.20 ENVIRONMENT

Painting work to generally follow the following sequences: � Complete surface preparation before commencing painting. � Apply primers, sealers, stains, undercoats, paints and clear coatings in the sequences laid down by

Resene. � Allow the full drying time between coats laid down by Resene. � Do not expose primers, undercoats and intermediate coats beyond Resene's recommendations before

applying the next coat. � Finish broad areas before painting trim. � Ensure batch numbers of tins are matched for whole areas. � Internally, paint ceilings before walls and walls before joinery, trim and other items.

3.21 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 120

Page 121: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Select brush, roller, or pad and apply coatings to the requirements of Resene to obtain a smooth, even coating of the specified thickness, uniform gloss and colour.

3.22 APPLICATION

Lightly sand primers, sealers, undercoats and intermediate coats to remove dust pick-up, protruding fibres and coarse particles.  Complete by removing dust immediately before applying the next coat.

3.23 LIGHTLY SAND

Correct defective work immediately and recoat as required, following precisely the Resene system being applied.

3.24 DEFECTIVE WORK

Each coat of paint and the completed paint system to have the following qualities and properties: � Uniform finish, colour, texture, sheen and hiding power and the proper number of coats applied. � No blemishes such as runs, sags, crinkling, fat edges, entrained paint skins, hairs, dust, bare or starved

patches, cracks, brush marks, ladder marks and blistering. � Proper covering of corners, crannies, thin edges, cracks, end grain and other difficult places of

application.

Completion

3.25 EACH COAT

Clean adjoining surfaces, glass and fittings of any paint contamination.  Clean off glass indicators at the completion of the building works.  Clean glass inside and out to a shining finish.  Use the Resene Washwise on site 'paint equipment clean-up water' reclamation system to minimise the environmental impact of cleaning paint application tools.

3.26 CLEAN

Leave the whole of this work uniform in gloss and colour, of correct thickness, free from painting defects, clean and unmarked and to the standard required by following procedures.

3.27 LEAVE

Remove dropsheets, coverings and masking to leave surrounding surfaces and areas clean, tidy and undamaged.  Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

3.28 REMOVE

Replace hardware without damage to it or the adjoining surface and leave hardware properly fitted and in working order.

3.29 REPLACE

Note: The use and disposal of paint and thinners represents a significant environmental hazard. Ensure all paint and thinners are disposed of in the following manner:

� When requested hand over part used paint containers to client for maintenance touch ups. � Recycle leftover paint at a Resene ColorShop as part of the Resene "Paintwise programme".  Contact

your local Resene ColorShop for details or view information online at www.resene.co.nz/paintwise.htm. � Donate left over paint to local community groups. � Solvent based paints, paint thinners, turpentine, mineral spirits and solvents require special disposal

procedures.  Do not pour down sewer or storm water drains, sinks or into the ground.  If they cannot be recycled they must be disposed of in a refuse dump licensed to take toxic waste.

3.30 DISPOSAL OF PAINTS AND THINNERS

4 SELECTIONS

Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR and 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR for selections. 4.1 SELECTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 121

Page 122: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

  This section relates to the surface preparation, painting and clear finishing of new and existing exterior substrates using Resene architectural and decorative coating systems.   Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 - New Ext Elevations

1 GENERAL

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related to painting work. Refer to 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR for interior paint systems.

1.1 RELATED WORK

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. 3.1 EXECUTION

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4 SELECTIONS

Paint system schedules

Resene exterior paint systems

4.1 INSPECTION OF WORK

Stage Resene One-Line Spec number/system Intermittent 1e 1.2 (EC), 2e 1.1 (EC),  25e 1.3/5 P (EC)

 

4.2 EXTERIOR CEMENTITIOUS SURFACES - HARDIES LINEA WEATHERBOARD AND TRIM, EXPOSED FOUNDATION WALLS

Description: Exterior cementitious surfaces, waterborne semi-gloss System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 1e 1.2 (EC) Surface prep: D83   For thin plaster - Resene Limelock D809, waterborne cure/seal 1st coat: For sound cementitious surfaces - Resene Concrete Primer D405,

waterborne primer; or   For powdery surfaces - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer   Self priming - Resene Sonyx 101 D30, waterborne semi-gloss 2nd coat: Resene Sonyx 101 D30, waterborne semi-gloss 3rd coat: Resene Sonyx 101 D30, waterborne semi-gloss 4th coat: Resene Multishield+ D54a, waterborne glaze (optional)

4.3 EXTERIOR TIMBERS - TIMBER FASCIAS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR Page 122

Page 123: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Description: Exterior timbers, waterborne gloss System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 2e 1.1 (EC) Surface prep: D82; and Resene TimberLock D48 NEC, solventborne

preserver/conditioner 1st coat: For normal recommended system - Resene Quick Dry D45, waterborne

primer/undercoat; or   For timber that stains - Resene Wood Primer D40NEC, solventborne

primer; or   For hardboard only - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Hi-Glo D31, waterborne gloss 3rd coat: Resene Hi-Glo D31, waterborne gloss

4.4 EXTERIOR METALLIC FINISHES - STEEL VERANDA POSTS

    Description: Exterior waterborne pearlescent System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 25e 1.3/5 P (EC) Surface prep: D83 1st coat: Resene Quick Dry D45, waterborne primer/sealer 2nd coat: Resene Lumbersider D34, waterborne satin 3rd coat: Resene Lumbersider D34, waterborne satin 4th coat: Resene Pearl Shimmer D312, waterborne pearlescent 5th coat: Resene Multishield+ D54a, waterborne glaze (optional)    

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR Page 123

Page 124: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR

  This section relates to the surface preparation, painting and clear finishing of new and existing interior substrates using Resene architectural and decorative coating systems.   Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 18, 40, 41, 42, 43 and 44

1 GENERAL

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related to painting work. Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR for exterior paint systems.

1.1 RELATED WORK

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. 3.1 EXECUTION

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4 SELECTIONS

Paint system schedules

Resene interior paint systems

4.1 INSPECTION OF WORK

Stage Resene One-Line Spec number/system Intermittent 2i 1.2 (EC),  15i 1.4 ZS Level 4 (EC),  15i 1.5 L4 Ceiling (EC)

  4.2 INTERIOR TIMBER - DOOR LEAVES, FRAMES AND TRIM

Description: Interior timber, waterborne semi-gloss System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 2i 1.2 (EC) Surface prep: D82; and Resene TimberLock D48NEC, solventborne

preserver/conditioner 1st coat: For normal recommended system - Resene Quick Dry D45, waterborne

primer/undercoat; or   For timber that stains - Resene Wood Primer D40NEC, solventborne

primer; or   For hardboard only - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer; or   For painting over varnish - Resene Waterborne Smooth Surface Sealer

D47a, waterborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Lustacryl D310, waterborne semi-gloss enamel 3rd coat: Resene Lustacryl D310, waterborne semi-gloss enamel

   

4.3 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTER/SOLID PLASTER/FIBROUS PLASTER - GIB BOARD PARTITIONS AND CEILINGS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR Page 124

Page 125: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

    For Level 4 system - Resene One-Line Spec No. 15i 1.4 ZS L 4 (EC) Remove Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal from Surface prep and add 1st coat: Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer D403, waterborne sealer    

    For Level 4 system - Resene One-Line Spec No. 15i 1.5 L 4 Ceiling (EC) Remove Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal from Surface prep and add 1st coat: Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer D403, waterborne sealer

Description: Interior paperfaced plaster/solid plaster/fibrous plaster, waterborne low sheen

System: ReseneOne-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.4 ZS Level 4 (EC) Surface prep: D84; D85; D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807,

waterborne prep 1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal

D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Zylone Sheen or Resene Zylone Sheen VOC Free D302,

waterborne low sheen 3rd coat: Resene Zylone Sheen or Resene Zylone Sheen VOC Free D302,

waterborne low sheen

Description: Interior paperfaced plaster/solid plaster/fibrous plaster, waterborne flat- ceiling

System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.5 Level 4 Ceiling (EC) Surface prep: D84; D85; D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807,

waterborne prep 1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal

D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat 3rd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR Page 125

Page 126: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM

  This section relates to the KemPex PEX Hot and Cold Water Piping Systems from MM Kembla NZ Ltd (hereafter referred to as KemPex), for domestic,commercial and industrial applications. It includes:

� piped cold water distribution from the supply position on site to designated points and appliances

� the installation of hot water heating appliances, piped hot water distribution to other appliances

� the installation of valves and other items to complete the system   Refer to drawing 1535 GA.17  New Plumbing Plan

1 GENERAL

Refer to 3820  Carpentry Refer to 4710P  Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation Refer to 7151  Sanitary fixtures, Tapware and Accessories

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section.

 

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC G4/AS1 Ventilation NZBC G12/AS1 Water supplies NZBC H1/AS1 Energy Efficiency AS/NZS 2492 Cross-linked polyethylene (PE-X) pipes for pressure applications AS/NZS 2537.2 Mechanical joining fittings for use with cross linked Polyethylene (PE-X) for

pressure applications - Plastics piping systems for hot and cold water installations - Cross linked Polyethylene (PE-X) - Fittings

AS/NZS 2845.1 Water supply - Backflow prevention devices - Materials, design and performance requirements

AS 2845.3 Water supply - Backflow prevention devices - Field testing and maintenance

AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 Plumbing and drainage - Water services AS/NZS 3500.4 Plumbing and drainage - Heated water services   NZS 4305 Energy efficiency domestic type hot water systems NZS 4607 Installation of thermal storage electric water heaters: valve vented

Systems NZS 4617 Tempering (3-port mixing) valves SAI Global Watermark Certificate WMK 25757 - KemPex Pipe SAI Global Watermark Certificate WMK 25717 - KemPex Fittings

NZ Backflow Testing Standard:

NZ Backflow Testing Standard 2011, Field testing of backflow prevention devices and verification of air gaps

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: KemPex Slide™ (Sliding Sleeve) Product Catalogue KemPex Crimp™ (Copper Crimp) Product Catalogue Kembla - The Plumbers Handbook Kembla Brazing Manual   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: MM Kembla NZ Ltd Web: www.kembla.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 274 0111 Facsimile: 09 274 0347

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 126

Page 127: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Warranties

Kembla warrants that the KemPex pipe and fitting systems are free from manufacturing defects, including materials and workmanship, and are suitable for use in potable hot and cold water systems (Black Pex), underfloor central heating (Pink Pex), recycled water (Lilac Pex) and rainwater (Green Pex) for a period of 25 years, with the following conditions:  

� The KemPex product must be inspected by the installer on site before installation to determine that no damage has occurred whilst in transit, stored or during installation.

� The KemPex system has been installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's documents, copies of which are available from all KemPex distributors together with the practices and procedures contained in AS/NZS 3500.1:2003, AS/NZS 3500.4, AS/NZS 3500.5

Requirements

1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Warranty period: 25 years From: Date of completion of system testing.

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified KemPex brand products, components or accessories 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Installers to be experience competent tradesmen, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified.  Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Pipework layouts to be in accordance with the manufacturer's documents and with AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 and AS/NZS 3500.4, or NZBC G12/AS1.

1.7 PIPEWORK LAYOUTS

To achieve a durability of 50 years, the design and installation work covered by this part of the specification must comply with NZBC B2/AS1, table 1.

Performance

1.8 DURABILITY

Planning, installation and commissioning to comply with AS/NZS 3500.1:2003, AS/NZS 3500.4, AS/NZS 3500.5 and to KemPex technical information.  Size the pipe branches and straight runs to deliver the acceptable flow rate at each outlet to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies, table 3, acceptable flow rates to sanitary fixtures.  Allow for the expected concurrent use of adjoining fixtures and size the piping layout to eliminate loss of pressure at any point by simultaneous draw off.

1.9 SYSTEM DESIGN

Testing method and compliance to AS/NZS 3500.1:2003, section 16.  Supply potable water and the apparatus needed.  Flush system of all foreign material, pressure test the water filled system (without air pockets) at 1500kPa for 30 minutes.

1.10 TESTING

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

To AS/NZS 2492, peroxide-cross-linked HD Polyethylene, designated as PE-Xa, complete with dezincification resistant (DZR) brass fittings and accessories brand matched to the pipe manufacturer's requirements with durability to NZBC B2/AS1, table 1 and NZBC G12/AS1, table1.  KemPex hot and cold water pipes for potable water and heating, in residential and commercial applications have a maximum operation temperature of 95°C and the maximum operating pressure of 2000kPa for PN20 pipe. Hot water systems to operate with a tempering valve to limit the maximum operating pressure of 10 bars at 70°C for a period of 50 years for the PN20 PE-Xa system.   KemPex piping classified as follows:

  KemPex carries the SAI Global Watermark Certificate WMK 25757 for KemPex Pipe and WMK 25717 for KemPex Fittings.

2.1 PE-XA POLYETHYLENE PIPE

KemPex Black PE-Xa with an outer black PE layer for UV protection for hot and cold water services

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 127

Page 128: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

KemPex DZR brass sliding sleeve and copper crimp fittings are made of forged brass to comply with AS/NZS 2537.2

2.2 FITTINGS

Brackets, clips, support channels and KemPex manual and battery tool complete with pipe expander available for system installation.

Materials - hot water heating appliances

2.3 FIXINGS AND TOOLS

To NZS 4305, ceramic-coated steel thermal storage cylinder, insulated and complete with required fittings. 2.4 ELECTRIC HOT WATER CYLINDER, MAINS PRESSURE

To NZS 4305, wall-mounted boiling water heater in pre-finished cabinet, complete with tap draw off.

Components

2.5 ELECTRIC BOILING CYLINDER, WALL MOUNTED - KITCHEN SINK, SHOWER PUSH THROUGH

To the requirements of the network utility operator. 2.6 WATER METER

Pressure reducing or limiting valve, filter, non-return valve, cold water expansion valve, pressure relief or temperature valve, pressure relief valve and isolating valves to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies.

2.7 VALVES

Provide backflow prevention devices to AS/NZS 2845 where it is possible for water or contaminants to backflow into the potable water supply.  Refer to NZBC G12 AS/1, 3.4 Backflow protection, and NZBC G12 AS/1, table 2, Selection of Backflow Protection.

2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES

Tempering valve to NZS 4617 and to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies. 2.9 TEMPERING VALVE

Manufactured from copper or brass, with maximum of 9 outlets per hot water cylinder.  Complete with tempering valve and valves to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies. Provides balanced hot water pressure at each outlet.

2.10 ECO-FLOW DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEM

Pre-formed black polyethylene complete with access opening and lid and overflow tray. 2.11 HEADER TANKS

Pre-formed closed cell polymer pipe sections complete with bends and fittings, with protective tape to the manufacturer's requirements and to NZBC H1/AS1 and to AS/NZS 3500.4.8 Energy efficiency.

2.12 PIPE INSULATION

Plasticised PVC tape system with primer, mastic fixing and outer coating. 2.13 PROTECTIVE TAPE

BRANZ appraised modified MS neutral cure sealant. 2.14 SEALANT

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Handle and store pipes, fittings and accessories to avoid damage.  Store on site, under cover out of direct UV radiation, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress.   Store fittings and tapware in a shelved, dry and securely locked area.  Retain tapware in the manufacturer's original packaging, complete with all fixings and installation instructions.  Label each unit separately with its space/fixture number to match.

3.1 HANDLE AND STORE

Review location and fit core holes and sleeves as needed throughout the structure in conjunction with the boxing, reinforcing and placing of concrete.  Strip core holes and make good after installation of pipework.

3.2 CORE HOLES AND SLEEVES

Concealed pipework within the fabric of the building unless detailed otherwise. 3.3 CONCEALED

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 128

Page 129: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

UV radiation (e.g. sunlight or some types of fluorescent lights) may damage the pipes. Pipes installed in areas where they could be exposed to UV radiation must be completely covered to protect them, e.g. by using a protective sleeve such as Kempex Conduit.

3.4 UV PROTECTION FOR INSTALLED PIPEWORK

Separate all metals subject to electrolytic action from each other and from treated timber, concrete and other lime substances by space, taping, or separator strips.

3.5 CORROSION

Accommodate movement in pipes resulting from temperature change by the layout of the pipe runs, by expansion joints and by sleeving through penetrations using KemPex Conduit system.  For long runs in the hot water service an offset bend or omega bend may be required.  Refer to manufacturer's details.

3.6 THERMAL MOVEMENT

Flow rates to each outlet to be no less than those given in NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies, table 3, Acceptable flow rates to sanitary fixtures.  Pipe size as determined in table 4, Tempering valve and nominal pipe diameters or for Manifold Eco - Flow system IRC 2003.

Application - jointing

3.7 PIPE SIZE

Seal joints by sliding the brass sleeve over the joint with an axial press tool or by crimping the fittings to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies, depending on the fitting system selected.  Refer to SELECTIONS for preferred jointing system.

3.8 JOINING PE-XA PIPE

When connecting to other pipe systems use a threaded connection to provide a clear separation between both systems.

Application - pipework installation

3.9 CONNECTION TO OTHER PIPE SYSTEMS

To AS/NZS 3500.1:2003.  From connection point, run pipes complete with all fittings, supports and fixings and join in accordance with the manufacturer's documents.  Pipework support spacing to be firmly fixed and buffered to eliminate noise and water hammer, complete with KemPex fittings and necessary valves.  Conceal pipework and pressure test before the wall linings are fixed.   Do not install PE-Xa cross linked polyethylene pipe for flow and return piping to any solar water heating system.  Use the KEMBLA® Copper for all Solar and uncontrolled heat sources (e.g. wood fired heaters) and around hot water cylinders.

3.10 POTABLE WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORK INSTALLATION

To AS/NZS 3500.4.  Use a take-off spigot to give separate branches to each fitting, lay out pipes with support spacing to NZBC G12/AS1, table 7 Water supply pipework support spacing.  Pipework support spacing to be firmly fixed and buffered to eliminate noise and water hammer, complete with KemPex fittings and necessary valves.  Lag all pipes with rigid or flexible pipe insulation to the manufacturer's requirements and NZBC G12/AS1.

3.11 HOT WATER PIPEWORK

Earth metallic water supply pipe and metallic sanitary fixtures to NZBC G12/AS1, 9.0.

Application - hot water systems

3.12 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING

Install hot water cylinders complete to the manufacturer's requirements and to NZBC G12/AS1, 6.11, Water heater installation.  Valve-vented systems to NZS 4607.  Install Kembla Copper around the hot water cylinder to a minimum of 1 metre prior to the installation of the KemPex piping system.

3.13 HOT WATER CYLINDER INSTALLATION GENERALLY

For non-gas appliances  NZBC G12/AS1 provides restraint options, one option for storage cylinders of up to 360 litres, is NZBC G12/AS1, figure 14, which is an easily understood solution.

3.14 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS - NON-GAS WATER HEATING APPLIANCES

Install to the cylinder manufacturer's stated requirements.  Locate where shown. 3.15 INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED BOILING CYLINDER

Install one metre minimum from outlet of hot water cylinder and to manufacturer's instructions.

Installation - tapware

3.16 INSTALL TEMPERING VALVE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 129

Page 130: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Install isolating valves for appliances in accessible positions.  Locate in adjacent cupboards and position to allow for easy connection and operation.

3.17 INSTALLING APPLIANCE ISOLATING VALVES - CONCEALED

Provide and install backflow prevention device as near as practicable to the potential source of contamination, and in an accessible position for maintenance and testing to AS 2845.3 or NZ Backflow Testing Standard.

3.18 INSTALLING BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE

Install tapware supplied under 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES.  Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Completion

3.19 INSTALLING TAPWARE

Label all pipework with permanent adhesive markers at 3 metre minimum intervals. 3.20 LABEL

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.21 REPLACE

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.22 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and building elements from the site. 3.23 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.kembla.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Water main

4 SELECTIONS

Pipework

4.1 POLYETHYLENE WATER MAIN

Size: 25mm outside diameter

4.2 KEMPEX PE-XA CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM

Brand: KemPex - Black Pipe sizes: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.17 - 20mm an 15mm

4.3 KEMPEX JOINING SYSTEM

Type: KemPex Crimp™ fitting

Hot water systems

4.4 PIPEWORK RIGID INSULATION

Brand: Bradford Gold Material: Closed cell polymer Wall thickness: 13mm    

4.5 ELECTRIC HOT WATER CYLINDER, MAINS PRESSURE

Brand: Rheem Model size: 90 Litre

4.6 ELECTRIC BOILING CYLINDER, WALL MOUNTED - STAFF KITCHEN

Brand: Rheem Laser Designer Series Model size: 5.0 litre

Valves and accessories

4.7 ELECTRIC BOILING CYLINDER, WALL MOUNTED - PUDH THROUGH SYSTEM IN SHOWER ROOM

Brand: Supplied by Parex Industires Ltd Model size: Triton T80Z Fast-Fit Electric Shower

4.8 FLOOR/ZONE ISOLATING VALVES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 130

Page 131: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Location: To be agreed on site Brand/type: Zurn

4.9 APPLIANCE ISOLATING VALVES - CONCEALED

Appliance: To be agreed on site Brand/type: Zurn

4.10 TEMPERING VALVE

Location: Within 1 metre of the outlet from the hot water cylinder Brand/type: Zurn

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 131

Page 132: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES

  This section relates to the supply and installation of sanitary fixtures, tapware and sanitary accessories.   Refer to drawings 1535 GA.11 (Foundation/Drainage Plan), 12, 13 and 17 (New Plumbing Plan)

1 GENERAL

Refer to 5517LB  Laminex New Zealand Benchtops Refer to 7123KP   KemPex Hot and Cold Water System Refer to 7420 Sanitary Systems - for the supply and fitting of waste disposal pipework Refer to 7701  Electrical Basic for electrical connection of accessories

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:  

Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006   Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.  However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC E3/AS1 Internal moisture NZBC F2/AS1 Hazardous building materials NZBC G1/AS1 Personal hygiene NZBC G12/VM1 Water supplies NZBC G12/AS1 Water supplies NZBC G13/AS1 Foul water NZBC G13/AS3 Plumbing and drainage AS/NZS 1730 Washbasins AS/NZS 2023 Baths for ablutionary purposes AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 Plumbing and drainage - water services AS/NZS 3500.2:2003 Plumbing and drainage - sanitary plumbing and drainage AS/NZS 3662 Performance of showers for bathing NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Caroma Industries New Zealand Ltd Mercer Products Ltd   Copies of the above literature are available from ~

Requirements

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Web: www.caroma.co.nz www.mercers.co.nz www.methven.com

Email: [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]

Telephone: 09 279 2700 - caroma 021 945 444 - mercer 021 745 335 - methven

Facsimile: 0800 423 825 - caroma 0800 2 637 237 - mercer 07 574 6606 - methven

Plumbers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified.  Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a Certifying Plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

1.5 SAMPLES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 132

Page 133: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Submit samples on request of nominated tapware, along with the relevant manufacturers' technical literature for review.

A specialist in the supply of tapware, and employing experienced architectural representatives available to assist during the course of the installation.

1.6 SUPPLIER

2 PRODUCTS

Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.1 SANITARY FIXTURES

Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.2 TAPWARE

Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.3 SANITARY APPLIANCES

Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.4 SANITARY ACCESSORIES

Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.5 ELECTRICAL SANITARY ACCESSORIES

Conditions - sanitary fixtures

3 EXECUTION

Only deliver to the site fixtures or fittings that can be immediately unloaded into suitable storage or be placed for direct installation.

3.1 DELIVERY

Take delivery of and store components complete with protective casings and coverings in areas that are enclosed, clean and dry and where no work is being done.  Remove protection only to the extent that will allow installation.

3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING

Installation work to comply with NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1, NZBC G13/AS1 and the fixture manufacturer's requirements.

3.3 QUALITY STANDARDS INCLUDING NZBC G13/AS1

Ensure substrate and fixings will allow work of the specified standard. 3.4 SUBSTRATE

Do not proceed if the points of supply and drainage services do not match the points of the fixtures without force or distortion.

3.5 CO-ORDINATION

Install to NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1, NZBC G13/AS1, NZBC E3/AS1 and to the fixture manufacturer's installation requirements for each component.  Carry out preparatory and assembly work, including connections to supply and drainage services and the application of slurries and sealants in sequence. Seal between all sanitary fixtures and wall linings, fixtures and the tops they are in, the tops and wall linings, to NZBC E3/AS1, 3.2.2.  Fixtures include baths, basins, tubs or sinks,  Tops include, vanities, bath surrounds, sink benches, etc, and there upstands.

3.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING NZBC G13/AS1

Confirm fixing points needed for each unit and provide solid blocking at each fixing bracket location.

Conditions - tapware

3.7 PROVIDE SUPPORT

Retain tapware in the manufacturer's original packaging and ensure that units are complete with fixings and installation instructions.  Label each unit separately with its fitting name and space number.

3.8 RETAIN

3.9 STORE

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 133

Page 134: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Store tapware packages in a shelved, dry and securely locked area.  Provide supervision when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed; signing off each package from the schedule as released.

Conditions - sanitary accessories

Retain fixtures, fittings and hardware in the manufacturer's original packaging and ensure that units are complete with associated fixings and installation instructions.  Label each unit separately to match the submitted and approved schedule.

3.10 RETAIN

Package fixtures, fittings and hardware units required in clear plastic and label each to match the drawings and the submitted schedule.  Place packages in cartons selected for 'level', 'location', and/or 'sector' and label the packages and the cartons similarly.

3.11 PACKAGE

Store items in a shelved, dry and securely locked area.  Provide supervision when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed; signing off each package from the schedule as released.

3.12 STORE

Before starting the installation of proprietary items, check relevant spaces and wall and floor finishes for any condition that would not allow the proper installation of any unit.  Do not proceed until such conditions have been remedied.

Installation - sanitary fixtures

3.13 INSPECTION

Carry out preparatory and assembly work, including connections to supply and drainage services and the application of slurries/bedding and sealants in sequence.  Fit the toilet pan in position, plumb, level, flush and rigid without stressing the attachment points of the component.  Fixings to be corrosive resistant.  Fit seat.

3.14 INSTALLING TOILET PAN

Fit firmly in place and connect the specified cisterns from the supply services through the flush pipes to the relative fixtures in the positions as detailed all plumb and level.

Installation - Basins

3.15 INSTALLING CISTERNS

Install to NZBC G1/AS1, AS/NZS 1730.  Set basins firmly to walls or vanities as detailed and to comply with NZBC E3/AS1.  Connect  to supply and drains through trap to the drainage system.

3.16 INSTALLING WASHBASINS

Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.  Cut out basin profile to basin manufacturer's template. Make penetrations for supply and drainage.  Fix securely with corrosive resistant fixings.  Seal top and upstand to wall surface to comply with NZBC E3/AS1.

Installation - Showers

3.17 INSTALLING VANITIES - BLANK TOP

Shower waste, mixer and rose to be install to NZBC G1/AS1 and to AS/NZS 3662. 3.18 INSTALLING SHOWER FITTINGS

Install in accordance with NZBC E3/AS1.  Sit tray firmly in place as detailed, to levels shown and connect to drainage service, ready for following work.  Fit screen and door unit to manufacturer's details.  Lining materials and finishes to comply with NZBC E3/AS1.

Installation - Sinks

3.19 INSTALLING SHOWER ENCLOSURES AND WALL LININGS

Install in accordance with manufacturer's/supplier's requirements.  Connect to supply and drainage services.

Installation - Miscellaneous

3.20 INSTALLING SINK BENCHES

Carry out preparatory work and fit elements in position plumb, level, flush and rigid without stressing the attachment points in sequence.  Connect to supply and drainage services.

3.21 INSTALLING STAINLESS STEEL FIXTURES

3.22 INSTALLING SANITARY FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES - PEOPLE WITH DISABILITIES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 134

Page 135: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Install fixtures to NZBC G1/AS1: Part 3 and Part 4 and to comply with the relevant layouts shown in Figures 5,6,7,8 and 9.  Provide number of facilities in accordance with NZBC G1/AS1 tables 1, and 2.

Application - tapware

To AS/NZS 3500.1 dated 2003 and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.  Maintain safe water temperatures to comply with NZBC G12/AS1.

Application - sanitary accessories

3.23 GENERAL

Fit specified fittings firmly in place at required dimensions relative to floor and adjoining sanitaryware fittings, all plumb and level.

3.24 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

Locate units at heights and/or locations shown on the drawings, or as required to comply with NZBC G1/AS1.  For any dimension not shown or known, request direction before proceeding.

3.25 LOCATE

Where cutting and fitting of the substrate is necessary for installing any unit, carry out this work before the painting or finishing of that surface.  Remove any hardware when required for painting, placing it in the packaging or carton originally supplied and returning it to the secure store until ready for re-installation.

3.26 CUTTING AND FITTING

Install each unit in accordance with the proprietary fixture manufacturer's requirements, using the templates and tools supplied or recommended by them.  Set units level, plumb and true to line and required location, with moving parts and actions freely and easily operating.  Do not make any modifications to supplied units.

Completion

3.27 INSTALLING UNITS

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.28 REPLACE

Leave fixtures, fittings and accessories clean and unblemished with stickers and protective coverings removed, with supply and drainage connections and all parts fully operating and working.  Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish required for following work.

3.29 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.30 REMOVE

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 TOILET - STANDARD

Location: W.C.'s, Shower room Toilet pan: Caroma Opal 2000 Smartflush Trap type: S trap Toilet seat: Caroma Pedigree ll Flush system: Close coupled cistern Isolating valve: Required

4.2 TOILET - DISABLED ACCESS ROOM

Location: Disabled access W.C. Toilet pan: Caroma Trident Sovereign Care toilet suite Trap type: S trap Toilet seat: Pressalit seat Flush system: Separate cistern Isolating valve: Required

4.3 BASIN - DISABLED ACCESS ROOM

Location: Disabled access W.C. Basin: Caroma Concorde 500 wall basin Basin taps/mixer: Methven Futura FT basin mixer Waste/plug: Chromed brass Trap: P/S trap - White plastic Isolating valve: Required

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 135

Page 136: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

4.4 VANITY UNIT - BLANK TOP

Location: W.C's, Shower room Vanity: Caroma Centro Vanity basin Basin taps/mixer: Methven Futura FT basin mixer Colour: White

4.5 SHOWER ENCLOSURE

Location: Shower room Shower tray: Walk in shower Liner: Serratone Door: Curtain on pvc hooks Trap/waste: Easy clean trap Shower set: Triton T80Z Fast-Fit Electric Shower system (Parex Industries Ltd)    

4.6 KITCHEN COMBINED SINK AND DRAINER

Location: Staff room Sink drainer model: Mercer Seattle - MSS 950-1 Mixer: Methven Promix Sink Mixer Waste/plug: Chromed brass Trap: P/S trap - White plastic Isolating valves: Required

Taps not related to and separate from sanitary fixtures:  

4.7 TAPWARE - MISCELLANEOUS

Hose tap external: Methven Hose Tap Male  

4.8 SANITARY ACCESSORIES

Location: All W.C.'s, Shower room Roll holder: Caroma Liano Toilet Roll holder Towel ring: Caroma Liano Towel Ring  

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 136

Page 137: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS

  This section relates to Marley rainwater disposal systems. It includes;

� uPVC downpipes   Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 New Ext Elevations

1 GENERAL

Refer to 4311D  Dimond Profiled Metal Roofing

Documents

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC E1/AS1 Surface water NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 4020 Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Marley Rainwater Brochures Marley Product Catalogue Marley uPVC spouting and downpipes - Your easy installation guide     Manufacturer/supplier contact details

WARRANTIES

1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: Marley New Zealand Limited Web: www.marley.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 MARLEY (0800 627 539)

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier Guarantee:

  � Commence the guarantee from the date of purchase � Refer to Marley NZ Guarantee available at www.marley.co.nz

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

15 years: Against defects in material and manufacture

Provide an installer/applicator warranty:

  � When installed to Marley's published installation instructions at time of installation. � Provide this warranty on the installer/applicator standard form. � Workmanship warranty to be issued separately by the installer � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

  Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR

3 years: For installation

Installers to be experienced, competent workers familiar with the materials and techniques specified. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Marley systems, components and associated products listed in this section.

Performance

1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS Page 137

Page 138: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Test the completed Marley rainwater disposal system with water to ensure, spouting is laid to correct fall, that both spouting and downpipes are unobstructed and that no ponding occurs in spoutings.

1.8 TEST

Layout, falls and capacity of spouting to falls and the size and position of downpipes to comply with NZBC E1/AS1.

1.9 DESIGN

Materials

2 PRODUCTS

Marley uPVC spouting and downpipe systems in white uPVC.

Products

2.1 UPVC WHITE SPOUTING/DOWNPIPES

Marley downpipes system, complete with Marley fittings including bends, clips, joiners and junctions supplied by Marley.  Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

Components

2.2 MARLEY DOWNPIPES

Only Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement to be used in conjunction with the spouting and downpipe systems to manufacturer's instructions.  Colour match to spouting or downpipes.

2.3 MARLEY MCS SOLVENT WELDING CEMENT

Special items can be fabricated by Marley to specific dimensions on request including but not limited to angle flats, angle rakes, outlets and adaptors.

2.4 FABRICATION

Conditions

3 EXECUTION

Handle and store Marley downpipes, spouting and accessories to avoid damage.  Store on site under cover, on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress.  Store out of direct sunlight. Refer to Marley installation guides for further details.

3.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE

Check that fascias, barges or cladding are level and true to line and face and will allow work of the required standard without distortion to the product alignment.  Do not proceed until they are up to standard.

3.2 SUBSTRATE

Make adequate provision in the jointing of the spouting for thermal movement in the length of the spouting by using Marley expansion joiners and/or expansion outlets.  Refer to Marley expansion technical information.

3.3 THERMAL MOVEMENT

Marley Spouting and Downpipe systems are suitable for most environmental conditions and will never rust, rot or corrode.

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL

All Marley manufactured spouting and downpipe systems are 100% recyclable and Marley operates recycling programs with industry suppliers where uPVC pipes can be returned from site for recycling at Marley.

Application

3.5 RECYCLING

Install to Marley's current published installation instructions available at www.marley.co.nz.  Ensure that all joints are sealed properly using Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement.  Assemble downpipes, solvent cement jointed complete, fit to outlets, fix with pipe clips every 1.5 metres, fix pipe clips with 304 stainless steel screws, plumb and discharging into the stormwater gully or pipe inlet to the Marley required practice.

Painting Marley uPVC spouting/downpipes

3.6 INSTALL MARLEY DOWNPIPES

After installation use a mineral based undercoat and two coats of 100% weatherable acrylic paint.  Do not paint the inside of spouting or internal brackets.

3.7 PAINTING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS Page 138

Page 139: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Completion

Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.8 REPLACE

Leave the whole of this work discharging completely and freely into the stormwater system and free of all debris.  Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.

3.9 LEAVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.10 REMOVE

For further details on selections go to www.marley.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

uPVC system

4 SELECTIONS

Painting

4.1 MARLEY UPVC DOWNPIPES

Manufacturer: Marley Profile/type: Round RP65 Size: 65mm Colour: White Bracket type: Stand-off bracket

4.2 PAINTING

Brand/type: Resene Lumbersider Finish/colour: To be confirmed

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS Page 139

Page 140: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS

  This section relates to above ground gravity flow sanitary systems;

� for foul water � from sanitary fixtures to first underground drain connection � including system wastes, floor wastes, floor waste gullies, traps, vents and valves � with associated components and accessories to make the system work

  Refer to drawings 1535 GA.11 New Foundation / Drainage Plan and GA.12  New Floor Plan - References

1 GENERAL

Refer to 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES for sanitary fixtures tapware and accessories. Refer to 7430 DRAINAGE for underground drains.

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Documents referred to in this section are:

Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC G1/AS1 Personal hygiene NZBC G13/AS1 Foul water - Sanitary plumbing NZBC G13/AS3 Plumbing and drainage AS 2887 Plastic waste fittings AS/NZS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent applications AS/NZS 2032 Installation of PVC pipe systems  

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Marley New Zealand Ltd   Copies of the above literature are available by phoning 09 279 2799

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCTS

PVC-U pipe to AS/NZS 1260 complete with fittings brand-matched to the pipe manufacturer's requirements. 2.1 PVC-U WASTE, DISCHARGE AND VENT PIPES

White polybutylene or PVC, including all associated fittings. 2.2 EXPOSED PIPES AND TRAPS

3 EXECUTION

Carry out this work and complete all tests to NZBC G1/AS1: 2.0, 3.0 and NZBC G13/AS1. 3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY - NZBC G13/AS1

Avoid electrolytic action by eliminating actual contact or continuity of water between dissimilar metals. 3.2 ELECTROLYTIC ACTION

Connect waste outlets to traps and run waste pipes and back vents concealed, sized and fixed to NZBC G13/AS1 and AS/NZS 2032.  Discharge wastes into the drainage system stack, soil pipe, or gully trap as shown.  Bird proof mesh to all roof vents and vermin proof mesh to all untrapped waste pipes.

3.3 INSTALL TRAPS, WASTE AND VENT PIPES - NZBC G13/AS1

At penetrations through constructions provide and fit collars and escutcheon plates to match pipework. 3.4 PENETRATIONS

Test soil and waste disposal systems to ensure no leakage exists and leave in proper working order. 3.5 TEST

3.6 CLEAN UP

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS Page 140

Page 141: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Remove labels and clean fittings.  Remove unused materials from the site.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 PVC-U WASTE, DISCHARGE AND VENT PIPES

Brand/type: Marley - Drain, waste and vent sizes as shown on drawing 1535 GA.11

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS Page 141

Page 142: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

7430 DRAINAGE

  This section relates to the supply and laying of gravity foul water (sewage), stormwater and groundwater drainage.   Refer to drawing 1535 GA.11 New Foundation / Drainage Plan  

1 GENERAL

Documents referred to in this section are:

Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006

1.1 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO

NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC E1/AS1 Surface water NZBC G13/AS2 Foul Water NZBC G13/AS3 Plumbing and Drainage AS/NZS 1254 PVC-U pipes and fittings for Stormwater and Surface Water applications AS/NZS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent applications AS/NZS 2032 Installation of PVC pipe systems AS/NZS 2033 Installation of Polyethylene pipe systems AS 2439.1 Perforated Plastics Drainage and Effluent Pipes and Fittings - Perforated

drainage pipe and associated fittings AS/NZS 2566.1 Buried Flexible Pipelines - Structural Design AS/NZS 2566.2 Buried Flexible Pipelines - Installation NZS 3104 Specification for concrete production   NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings     AS/NZS 5065 Polyethylene and polypropylene pipes and fittings for drainage and

sewerage applications

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Marley New Zealand Ltd   Copies of the above literature are available from ~

1.2 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS

Web: www.marley.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 279 2799 Facsimile: 09 279 2798

Supply a 1:100 scale as-built drawing of drains and fittings to the territorial authority and to the owner on completion.

1.3 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS

Drainlayers to be experienced, competent and familiar with the materials and techniques specified.  Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying drainlayer under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCTS

17.5 MPa prescribed mix to NZS 3104. 2.1 CONCRETE

Plain round and/or deformed steel bars, Grade 300 to AS/NZS 4671. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT

PVC-U pipes bends, junctions, fittings and joints to AS/NZS 1254 and AS/NZS 1260. Underground PVC-U pipe to be Classified as follows:  

2.3 PVC-U PIPES

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7430 DRAINAGE Page 142

Page 143: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Classification Use SN4 - SN6 Domestic & light load areas SN8 - SN10 Commercial & Industrial medium load areas  

To NZBC G13/AS2: 3.3 Gully traps, complete with grating. 2.4 GULLY TRAPS - NZBC G13/AS2

Cast iron frame with lift-up grating. 2.5 SURFACE WATER SUMP GRATINGS

Cast iron frame with screw-down cover. 2.6 INSPECTION COVERS

2.7 TRENCH BACKFILLING MATERIAL - NZBC G13/AS2 & NZBC E1/AS1

Bedding: Clean granular non-cohesive material with a maximum particle size of 20 mm.

Bedding & surround: Clean granular non-cohesive material with a maximum particle size of 20 mm.

Compacted selected fill: Any Fine grain soil or granular material which is free from topsoil and rubbish and has a maximum particle size of 20 mm.

Ordinary fill: Excavated material. Concrete: 75 mm thick concrete pad.

Free draining crushed stone, 7 mm to 20 mm in size. 2.8 DRAINAGE MATERIAL

3 EXECUTION

Excavate for drains to a firm even base with correct gradients set in straight runs. Trenches running parallel, below and close to foundations of buildings to NZS 3604 or NZS 4229 to be separated to:

� NZBC E1/AS1, 3.9.7, Proximity of Trench to Building, for stormwater and subsoil drains. � NZBC G13/AS2, 5.6, Proximity of Trench to Building, for foul water drains.

3.1 EXCAVATE

All drainage installations to the pipe and fitting manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS

Carry out drainage work and tests to NZBC G13/AS2 (foul water), NZBC E1/AS1 (stormwater).  Lay uPVC pipe systems to relevant sections of AS/NZS 2032, NZS 2566.1 and AS/NZS 2566.2.  Lay polyethylene pipes and fittings to relevant sections of AS/NZS 2033 and NZS 2566.1.

3.3 DRAINAGE GENERALLY - NZBC G13/AS2 & NZBC E1/AS1

Lay drains in straight runs to correct gradients, to discharge into the network utility operator's sewer.  Set inspection fittings on a concrete base.

3.4 LAY FOUL WATER DRAINS

Set on concrete 50mm above the surrounding ground or paving and brought up to protect the top of the fitting.  Trowel off.

3.5 INSTALL GULLY TRAPS

Confirm the required location of downpipes and finished ground levels before commencing pipework.  Set downpipe bends in concrete with the concrete brought up to protect the top of the bend from damage.  Lay drains in straight runs to correct gradients to discharge into the network utility operator's stormwater system.

3.6 LAY STORMWATER DRAINS

To NZBC E1/AS1, complete with ceramic half-siphon pipe and cast iron frame with a lift out grating. 3.7 INSTALL SURFACE WATER SUMP

Construct as detailed on a poured concrete footing to NZBC E1/AS1, 3.7, Access for maintenance.  Provide all necessary haunching to channels.  Fit a cast iron cover and frame.

3.8 INSTALL STORMWATER INSPECTION CHAMBERS

Construct as detailed on a poured concrete footing to NZBC G13/AS2, 5.7 Access points.  Provide all necessary haunching to channels.  Fit a cast iron cover and frame.

3.9 INSTALL FOUL WATER INSPECTION CHAMBERS - NZBC G13/AS2

3.10 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7430 DRAINAGE Page 143

Page 144: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Concrete encase shallow drains and drains under driveways, on a 100mm deep 17.5 MPa concrete bed reinforced with three 10mm mild steel bars.  Surround pipes with a polythene membrane to allow movement and encase in 100mm 17.5 MPa concrete.

Field test drains for watertightness (PVC-U to AS/NZS 2032 or AS/NZS 2566. 2 Appendix N) to the satisfaction of the territorial authority inspector.

3.11 FIELD TEST

Granular bedding and selected fill shall be placed in layers no greater than 100 mm loose thickness and compacted. Base bedding (beneath the pipe) shall be placed and compacted before pipes are laid.   Up to 300mm above the pipe, compaction shall be by tamping by hand using a rod with a pad foot (having an area of 75 ± 25 mm by 75 ± 25 mm) over the entire surface of each layer to produce a compact layer without obvious voids, without disturbing the drains.   More than 300 mm above the pipe, compaction shall be by at least four passes of a mechanical tamping foot compactor (whacker type) with a minimum weight of 75 kg.

3.12 PLACING & COMPACTING TRENCH BACKFILLING MATERIAL

Place and rake in bedding material so as to support the pipe once laid. Embedment material shall be placed uniformly along and around the pipe to ensure uniform density of side support and overlay with no distortion, dislodgment or damage to the pipeline.  Following placement, the embedment material shall be compacted in layers to uniformly support the pipe.  Trench fill material shall be placed on the pipe embedment and compacted to fill the trench, with care taken to avoid impact loading of the pipe.

3.13 PLACING & COMPACTING TRENCH BACKFILLING MATERIAL FOR PVC-U PIPE

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 PVC-U PIPES

Brand/type: Marley uPVC drains

4.2 ACCESS POINTS

Brand: Marley Type: Small access chambers, inspection chambers, rodding points and

inspection points

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7430 DRAINAGE Page 144

Page 145: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC

  This section relates to the wiring for domestic and small scale commercial installations, including:

� power � lighting � electrically-powered fittings

  Refer to drawings 1535 GA.16, 18 and the lighting drawings

1 GENERAL

Refer to 7123KP  Kembla Pex Hot and Cold Water System Refer to 7151  Sanitary Fixtures, Tapware and accessories - Shower Hot Water Heater Refer to 7811  Communications Cabling

1.1 RELATED WORK

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

Documents

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

CFL compact fluorescent lamp ELV extra low voltage GLS general lighting service IP international (ingress) protection classification LCD liquid crystal display LED light emitting diode MCB miniature circuit breaker NUO Network Utility Operator PCB printed circuit board PIR passive infrared RCBO residual current-operated circuit breaker with over current protection RCCB residual current-operated circuit breakers RCD residual current device SIA security integration architecture TPS tough plastic sheathed TCF Telecommunications Carriers' Forum

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.  The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

1.3 DOCUMENTS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 145

Page 146: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010 TCF Premises Wiring Code of Practice 2011

NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC F6/AS1 Visibility in escape routes NZBC F7/AS1 Warning systems NZBC G4/AS1 Ventilation NZBC G9/AS1 Electricity AS/NZS 1125 Conductors in insulated electric cables and flexible cord AS/NZS 1768 Lightning protection AS/NZS 2201.1 Intruder alarm systems - Client's premises - Design, installation,

commissioning and maintenance AS 2293.1 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings - System design,

installation and operation AS 2293.3 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings - Emergency

escape luminaires and exit signs AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring

Rules) AS/NZS 3008.1.2 Electrical installations - Selection of cables - Cables for alternating

voltages up to and including 0.6/1 kV - Typical New Zealand installation conditions

AS/NZS 3100 Approval and test specification-general requirements for electrical equipment

AS/NZS 3112 Approval and test specification - Plugs and socket-outlets AS/NZS 3113 Approval and test specification - Ceiling roses AS/NZS 3190 Approval and test specification - Residual current devices (current-

operated earth-leakage devices) AS/NZS 3350.1 Safety of household and similar electrical appliances - General

requirements AS/NZS 3439.3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Particular

requirements for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended to be installed in places where unskilled persons have access for their use - Distribution boards

AS 3786 Smoke alarms NZS 4514 Interconnected smoke alarms for houses AS/NZS 5000.2 Electric cables - Polymeric insulated - for working voltages up to and

including 450/750v AS/NZS 60598.2.2 Luminaires - Particular requirements - Recessed luminaires IEC 61643 Components for low voltage surge protection devices

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: PDL Electrical Products   Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Warranties

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Company: PDL Electrical Products Web: www.pdl.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 101 152

Warrant the complete electrical installation under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials and execution.

  Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.

Requirements

1.5 WARRANTY

1 year: Warranty period

Comply with the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010, AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3008.1.2 and TCF Premises Wiring Code of Practice for listed and prescribed work and with the utility network operator's requirements.  Apply for the service connection.  Arrange for the required inspections of listed work.  Pay all fees.

1.6 COMPLY

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 146

Page 147: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Carry out work under the supervision of an electrical licensed supervisor.

Before installation work commences provide a declaration of conformity.  The declaration of conformity is to comply with the Electrical (Safety) Regulations (2010), regulations 57 and 58.  It must be signed by the designer of the installation.

1.8 SAFETY OF INSTALLATION - DESIGN BY ELECTRICIAN

Supply a certificate of compliance (CoC) to the owner, and if required the NUO, as required by the Electricity (Safety) Regulations (2010), prior to connection.

� Arrange for the NUO to inspect before the meter installation, listed work inspection, polarity check and supply becoming live.

� Arrange for an inspector to inspect as required by regulation 70.

1.9 ELECTRICAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

Provide an Electrical Safety Certificate (ESC), as required by the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010, to the owner and when required the BCA.  To be provided at completion of the work, prior to Practical Completion.

1.10 ELECTRICAL SAFETY CERTIFICATE

2 PRODUCTS

Tough plastic sheathed neutral screened cable to AS/NZS 4961 and AS/NZS 3008.1.2, with a minimum rating of 60 amps per phase.  Include pilot cable where required by network utility company.

2.1 MAINS SUPPLY, SINGLE PHASE

Tough plastic sheathed copper conductors to AS/NZS 5000.2, stranded above 1.0mm², and to AS/NZS 3008.1.2.  Minimum sizes as below.  Increase sizes if the method of installation, thermal insulation, cable length or load will reduce the cable rating below that of the MCB rating, or produce an excessive voltage drop.

  Heat resistant cable for final connections to all heated appliances, and high temperature cable in ambient conditions that may be above 35°C.

2.2 CABLES

Lighting circuits: Domestic: 1.5mm² on 10 amp MCBs Lighting circuits: Commercial:  1.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs Power circuits: 2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for domestic and unenclosed or unfilled cavity

construction   2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for domestic insulated construction, or filled

cavity   2.5mm² on 20 amp MCBs for unenclosed or unfilled cavity construction   2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for insulated construction, or filled cavity, or

lengths over 30 metres Hot water cylinder circuits: Single phase:  2.5mm² on 20 amp MCBs   Range/oven/hob circuits: Single phase:  6mm² on 32 amp MCBs  

Flush surface mount boards manufactured to AS/NZS 3439.3 and installed in accordance with AS/NZS 3000.  Manufactured from engineering grade resin with a glow wire rating of 850°C, complete with neutral and earth busbars, and insulated comb phase bar.  Distribution boards to have 20% spare capacity for future additions and alterations.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

General requirements including main switch 63A or 100A.  Residual current protection 30mA, ensure RCCBs' meet Type A and comply with AS/NZS 3190.  MCBs to 4.5kA or 6kA rated.

2.4 CIRCUIT PROTECTION

Standard grid size or equivalent to be manufactured from plastic or metal, with 2 or more gang size to be metal with steel inserts for accessory securing screws.  Screw fixed.

2.5 WALL BOXES

Single pole switches to be 16 amp minimum rated, double pole or intermediate to be 16 amp minimum rated.  All switches to be 230 volt a.c. polycarbonate flushplate units.  Refer to drawings/schedules for number of switches per unit, dimmer units, neon (indicator or toggle) units and 2 way units.

2.6 SWITCH UNITS

One way 20 amp switch complete with cable clamp for flexible PVC conduit to element enclosure. 2.7 HOT WATER SYSTEM SWITCH

10 amp, 230 volt flat 3 pin socket outlets fitted with safety shutters and manufactured to AS/NZS 3100, AS/NZS 3112 and AS/NZS 3113, single or multi gang as detailed.

2.8 SWITCHED SOCKET UNITS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 147

Page 148: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Protection for the homes appliances with IEC 61643 Class ll surge protection devices fitted to the switchboard.  For variable electronic equipment fit IEC 61643 Class lll surge protection to switched socket outlets.

2.9 SURGE PROTECTION

White plastic mounting base with screwed cover, manufactured to AS/NZS 3113.  Terminal type.  Cylindrical section TPS for suspended fittings.

2.10 CEILING ROSES

Standard white plastic bayonet cap, with cap angled where wall mounted.  Brass liners. 2.11 BATTEN HOLDERS

Fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge fittings with low loss control gear and power factor corrected to 0.95 minimum.  Control gear suitable for dimming if this is required.  All fittings complete with lamps; Incandescent GLS lamps pearl, coiled-coil 230v rated, bayonet cap; Fluorescent triphosphor 2700K; CFL; halogen ELV 12v dichroic reflector with cover glass unless detailed otherwise.

2.12 LIGHT FITTINGS

Ceiling, wall or duct mounted exhaust fans for ventilation to NZBC G4/AS1, and compliant with AS/NZS 3350.1. 2.13 EXHAUST FANS

3 EXECUTION

Lay underground mains to the NUO requirements.  Excavate trench, install cable and marker tape and backfill. 3.1 MAIN SUPPLY

Fit to AS/NZS 3000 and board manufacturer's requirements.  Recess into wall or surface mount and ensure fire containment properties of the enclosure are maintained.

3.2 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Install MCBs at distribution board to AS/NZS3000 to protect each final sub circuit. 3.3 CIRCUIT PROTECTION

Bond together and to earth all plumbing fittings not adequately isolated, to AS/NZS 3000, the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010 and the fitting manufacturer's requirements.

3.4 EARTH BONDS

Provide a plastic toby box to contain and protect the earth electrode.  Fix the connecting earth wiring closely and securely against wall surfaces.

3.5 MAIN EARTH

Install RCD protection to AS/NZS 3000. 3.6 EARTH LEAKAGE PROTECTION

Install 30mA RCDs at the distribution board for areas not covered in Domestic installations, or using fixed wired RCD protected socket outlets in areas that may represent increased risk of electric shock to the user:

� Wet areas: bathrooms, laundries, kitchens. � Near pools and water features. � Where intended for use with cleaning equipment. � Hand-held tools subject to movement in use, i.e. work-shops, garages.

3.7 HIGH RISK AREA INSTALLATIONS

The position of outlets and equipment shown on drawings is indicative of requirements.  Confirm documents and site conditions are not in conflict with other services or features.  Resolve conflicts and discrepancies before proceeding with work affected.  Confirm on site the exact location, disposition and mounting heights of all outlets, fittings, equipment, penetrations, and use of exposed wiring.  Fix outlet items level, plumb and in line.

3.8 SET-OUT

Install wiring systems to AS/NZS 3000.  All cabling run concealed.  No TPS cable laid directly in concrete.  Locate holes in timber framing for the passage of cables at the centre line of the timber member.  Install cable in conduits where required to pass through concrete or underground.  In walls run cabling horizontally and vertically in straight lines.  In ceilings either run cabling along ceiling framing or attached to catenary wires.  Clip cabling to ceiling framing/catenary wires.

3.9 CABLING

Install all circuits with the appropriately rated cable and circuit protection.  Install with a maximum of 8 light switch units or 4 double or single switched socket units on any circuit.  Minimum 2 lighting circuits per floor.  Separate circuits for all electric heating appliances.  Kitchen sockets to be on at least two different circuits.

3.10 CABLING CIRCUITS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 148

Page 149: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Mount flush in cavity construction size to fit products selected.  Fix vertically mounted wall boxes to studs.  Screw fix horizontally mounted switched socket outlet wall boxes to solid blocking or nogs.  Fix switch panel wall boxes to solid blocking.

3.11 WALL BOXES

Fit all single and double switch units, all sockets to the following heights (to the centre of the unit) unless shown otherwise on the drawings.

Mount light switches and switch socket outlets vertically and socket units horizontally.  Label all switch units that control electrical equipment or special lighting circuits by colour filled engraving on the switch.  Use proprietary engraved switch mechanisms where applicable.

3.12 SWITCH AND SOCKET UNITS

Switch Units: 1150mm above finished floor Socket Units: 150mm above work benches   400mm above finished floor

Locate isolating switches in positions as confirmed by the owner, when not specifically shown on the drawings. 3.13 ISOLATING SWITCHES

Install light fittings in locations and at heights specified and confirmed by the owner, in accordance with the fitting manufacturer's requirements.

3.14 LIGHT FITTINGS

Use electronic transformers for ELV lamps, one transformer per lamp.  Locate to manufacturer's requirements and as close as practicable to the lamp.  Ensure transformers and rear of light fittings are adequately ventilated and clear of any thermal insulation, to AS/NZS 3000.

3.15 EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING

Non-residential applications; The clearance between insulation and recessed downlights;

� Leave 100mm gap to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9 � Provide larger gaps where required by the downlight manufacturer

3.16 RECESSED LIGHT FITTINGS - CLEARANCE TO INSULATION

Wire as a separate circuit through a wall-mounted isolating switch, with the cable from switch to element encased in flexible PVC conduit, clamp fixed at each end.  Hot water cylinders, thermostats and 3000 watt element supplied and fitted under the hot and cold water system section.

3.17 ELECTRIC HOT WATER SYSTEM

Install surge protection devices to manufacturer's requirements and in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and AS/NZS 1768.  When fitting IEC 61643 Class ll protection at the switchboard, protect the device by a dedicated MCB.

3.18 SURGE PROTECTION

Install and wire fittings and equipment to individual fittings and equipment manufacturer's requirements.  Refer to the drawings for required layouts and locations for equipment.  Refer to SELECTIONS for schedules of fittings.

3.19 ELECTRIC POWERED FITTINGS AND EQUIPMENT

Include label under each controller, switch and circuit breaker on distribution boards.  Include a warning notice if light dimmers are used in the installation.  List the rating of each circuit.

Completion

3.20 LABELLING

Leave installation operating correctly, with equipment clean and operational. 3.21 COMPLETION

Materials

4 SELECTIONS

Confirm selections of all outlet fittings and hardware with the owner in writing before ordering. 4.1 SELECTIONS - FITTINGS AND HARDWARE

4.2 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 149

Page 150: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Outlets - fittings

Location: In New IT room   Brand / type: PDL Electrcial Products - DBS surface mounted   MCB:     RCCB:     RCBO:     Surge protectors:     Modular contactors:     Main switch:     Timers    

4.3 INTERIOR OUTLETS

Item Brand / type   Switch / socket outlets: PDL Electrcial Products   Coverplate colour: Cream - To be confirmed        

4.4 INTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS - REFER TO IDEAL DRAWINGS ATTACHED

Fitting Brand / type     LED Light fittings:          

4.5 EXTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS - REFER TO IDEAL DRAWINGS ATTACHED

Fitting Brand / type         Veranda lights:      

4.6 BATHROOM FANS - REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICES DOCUMENTS

Location Brand / type   Bathroom Extracts:    

4.7 WATER HEATERS

Item Brand / type   HWC: Rheem 90 litre mains pressure electric Hot water for shower: Triton T80Z electric shower Hot water in kitchen: Rheem Laser Designer wall mounted unit - 5.0 litre              

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 150

Page 151: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING

  This section relates to generic structured communications cabling systems for commercial projects.   Refer to drawing 1535 GA.16  New Electrical/Data Plan

Related work

1 GENERAL

Refer to 7701  Electrical Basic

Documents

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

Documents referred to in this section are:

  Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.  However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

Requirements

1.2 DOCUMENTS

NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring

Rules) AS/NZS 3080 Telecommunications installations - Integrated telecommunications cabling

systems for commercial premises AS/NZS 3084 Telecommunications installations - Telecommunications pathways and

spaces for commercial premises AS/NZS 3085.1 Telecommunications installations - Basic requirements AS/CA S009 Installation requirements for customer cabling (Wiring Rules)

Comply with AS/CA S009, AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3080, AS/NZS 3084, AS/NZS°3085.1, and the manufacturer's requirements.  Arrange for the required manufacturer's inspections of the listed work

1.3 COMPLY

Communications cabling installation to be carried out by competent workers experienced with the materials and in the techniques specified and accredited to work on the proposed manufacturer's system.

Warranties

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

Warrant this part of the work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials and execution.  

  Refer to general section 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT for the required format and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.

1.5 WARRANTY

2 years: Warranty period

Manufacture's warranty for the performance of the system under normal environmental and use conditions against failure.  

  Provide this warranty on the manufacture's standard form.

1.6 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

2 years: Warranty

Components

2 PRODUCTS

All system components (distributors, cabling and outlets), where possible, to be of a common manufacturer and every component to meet the required level of performance.

2.1 COMMON COMPONENTS

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Page 151

Page 152: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Supply and install to the Telecommunications Service Provider's requirements 2.2 DEMARCATION FRAME

Wall mounted cable distributor or rack mounted 8-pin modular patch fields for incoming voice cables (1 pair terminated per jack) and outgoing outlet field cables (4 pair terminated per jack).  Provide rack space and check that power outlets are provided and suitably located.  Provide cable management rings and jumper bars.  Minimum 30% spare space capacity in each field and overall rack capacity.

2.3 CABLE DISTRIBUTOR

Install equipment cords between the wall-mounted distributor and the equipment rack, or supply patch cords, for connecting between the equipment and the jack fields.

2.4 EQUIPMENT CORDS

2.5 OUTLETS

Telecommunications outlets:

100 ohm balanced category 6 - multiple outlets on common faceplates.

Outlet face plates: To match electrical socket outlet faceplates. Refer to SELECTIONS.

Aerial suitable for both VHF, UHF, analogue and digital reception, of all local free-to-air broadcast and pay channels.

2.6 TV AERIAL

Application

3 EXECUTION

Install to the manufacturer's requirements. 3.1 DISTRIBUTORS

Install to the manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 CABLES

Backbone cable: From demarcation point to distributor or enclosure. Multi-pair voice grade (Category 3), terminate one pair per jack.

  From distributor or enclosure, to PABX. Multi-pair voice grade (Category 3), terminate one pair per jack.

Horizontal cable: 4 pair 100 ohm balanced Category 6, per outlet, terminate 4 pair per jack.

Comply with AS/CA S009.  Conceal all cables.  Support all cables clear of hot and sharp surfaces without placing unnecessary strain on the cables or terminations.  Earthed or insulated high tensile catenaries or cable trays in ceiling/floor cavities.  Cable trays for greater than 24 cables in a common route.  Cables run parallel to power cables separated by 300mm and cross at right angles with segregation.  Do not share cable supports or penetrations with other services.

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

Quantities and locations as drawn.  Allow to move up to 2 metres prior to installation.  Confirm all locations prior to installation.  Mount at 400mm above finished floor level unless noted otherwise.  Mount aligned with electrical socket outlets where present, separated at 100mm centres.  Mount on Category 6 compliant skirting trunking where indicated.

3.4 OUTLETS

To AS/NZS 3080 and the manufacturer's requirements. 3.5 CONNECTING HARDWARE

Fix aerial, and ensure the system is suitable for high quality reception of all VHF, UHF, digital and satellite channels - Sky satellite TV installation practices minimum.  Test to ensure adequate TV/video at every outlet with a RF field strength meter.  Cable penetrations through the cladding to be weatherproofed to comply with NZBC E2/AS1.

Completion

3.6 TV AERIAL AND CABLING

At completion test to manufacturer's requirements and provide a certified copy of the results.  Correct or replace any sub-standard items and re-test.

3.7 TESTING

To AS/NZS 3085.1.  Common and consistent labelling on each outlet and at the Distributor.  Machine made permanent labels.  Arrange numbering sequentially by floor, then by room and then around the walls of each room.

3.8 LABELLING

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Page 152

Page 153: SPECIFICATION - Simkin

Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements.  Jointing cables is not permitted - replace any damaged or short cables.

3.9 REPLACE DAMAGED WORK

Leave work clean, undamaged, in full working order and to the standard required by following procedures. 3.10 LEAVE CLEAN

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from inside enclosures and from the rest of the site. 3.11 REMOVE DEBRIS

MATERIALS - REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONSULTANTS SPECIFICATION

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING ENCLOSURES

Manufacturer: ~ Brand/catalogue number:

~

4.2 DISTRIBUTORS

Manufacturer: ~ Brand/catalogue number:

~

4.3 COMMUNICATIONS CABLES

Cable Manufacturer / Type Multi-pair voice grade (Category 3): ~ 4 pair 100 ohm balanced Category 6: ~

4.4 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

Manufacturer: ~ Brand/catalogue number:

~ (8 position modular sockets)

Colour: ~

4.5 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

Item Brand / type TV aerial: ~ TV aerial amplifier: ~ Satellite dish: ~

Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833

© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Page 153